JP6643600B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed in a plurality of variable display regions based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and can generate a special game state when a result of the game is a special result.

  A variable display device capable of executing a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information based on a winning of a game ball in a start winning prize area; A start-up storage means capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the start-up prize area, wherein start-up storage means capable of storing start-up memory as an execution right of the variable display game based on winning of a game ball in the start-up winning area; Prior to execution of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, a preliminary determination means capable of determining the result of the variable display game based on the start memory; A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the start memory; and a preliminary announcement effect capable of executing an advance announcement effect corresponding to the specific effect, based on a determination result by the advance determination means. There is known a gaming machine comprising: a suggestion information display unit capable of displaying specific effect execution information indicating the execution of the specific effect as the advance notice effect (hereinafter, referred to as a preliminary notice effect). For example, see Patent Literature 1). That is, a gaming machine capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests execution of a predetermined effect is known.

JP 2014-226243 A

Conventional gaming machines have not been able to sufficiently enhance the interest in suggestive effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest in suggested effects.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed in a plurality of variability display regions based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when a result of the game is a special result,
A suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined identification information may be stopped and displayed can be executed for each of the plurality of variable display areas,
In the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of specific images are displayed,
The degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display area differs depending on the arrangement order of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in the suggestion effect.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a suggestion effect can be raised.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability set value change process. It is a flowchart explaining a probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure ordinary process. (A) is a flowchart illustrating the special figure 1 change start processing, and (b) is a flowchart illustrating the special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure changing process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process in the effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of the setting of the probability set value. 13 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a first modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 2nd modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a fixed condition monitoring process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a third modification. It is a flow chart explaining shift judgment processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability set value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means in a 5th modification, and a game control device. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value change process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation processing in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 10th modification. It is a figure explaining the information mode in the 11th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a flowchart explaining a modification of the main processing in the effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining an assist symbol control process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect replacement process. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of a game board. It is a flowchart explaining a replay control process. It is a flowchart explaining a pre-reading symbol system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch variation command processing. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of a game ball look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of a game ball look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of a game ball look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining a game ball storage device. It is a figure explaining a starting winning unit. It is a figure explaining a starting winning unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining an example of a game triggered by a false prize. It is a figure explaining an example of a game triggered by a false winning.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation handle 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is configured to be surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (CRT). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 serving as a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure change display game is provided by operating movable effect members. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In addition, the lower left portion of the center case 40 displays a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41, and a sub-display for displaying the number of startup memories. An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub-information display device 90 includes a first light-emitting unit that is a single light-emitting unit that forms a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol that executes a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game. A second sub-display comprising a sub-game display section 91 and a single light-emitting section serving as a sub-game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game A game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure change display game, using two light-emitting units, and a second special figure change display game executed using two light-emitting units. And a second sub-display unit 94 that indicates the number of second start-up memories that are the right to perform.

  In the first sub-game display section 91 and the second sub-game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is being changed and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking, and lit of the light emitting section. Can be displayed. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 indicate the numbers of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memories (special figure 2 hold) by turning off the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

  Since the sub-information display device 90 is provided separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 so that the display region of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display region is effectively used. be able to. The sub-information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board effect device 44, so that the sub-information display device 90 is not covered during the operation of the board effect device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate 34 (a normal figure start gate, a start area, an inflow area) for giving a start condition of the general figure change display game. A game ball that has won the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general prize ports 35 are arranged. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning port 36 (first start winning port, starting area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the first special figure variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, immediately below the start winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure changing display game.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in is maintained. Then, when the result of the normal-floating fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the opening of the game ball is easy to flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (an advantageous state for the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that a prize can be won even when the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is in the closed state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and to the right of the starting winning opening 36, special fluctuations that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special fluctuation prize winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The special winning opening is converted from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and during a special gaming state or a small hitting game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Has become. In addition, inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball flowing into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the special winning opening switches 38a in this manner, the game balls flowing into the special winning opening can be quickly detected.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), thereby aiming at winning in the starting winning opening 36, and firing a game ball to the right game area (so-called). By right-handing), it is possible to aim for a prize to the ordinary figure starting gate 34, the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the special variable prize winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through a flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the formation member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path formation member 42 from the front of the flow path formation member 42. .

  In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, which constitute the special figure change display game, and the general figure start gate 34 are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game triggered by winning, and displaying various information.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure change display game, which is configured with a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A second special-figure fluctuation display unit (figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, a fluctuating display unit (general figure display) 53 for the general-figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and an LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, 56 for informing the start storage number of each of the variable display games.
The collective display device 50 also includes a first game state display unit (a first game state display unit, a right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game, and A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time-saving state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs and notifies that a time-saving state has occurred, A third game state display section (third game state display, probability state display section) 59 for displaying that the game has been made, and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variable winning device 38). Is provided.
The collective display device 50 may further include a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the user of the big hit occurrence.

The special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during execution of the change display game, that is, while the decorative special figure change display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is blinked in addition to the center segment, and the change is performed. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “losing”, for example, the center segment is turned on as a result of the loss, and when the result of the game is “hit”, the result of the hit (special result) is determined. A game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

  The general-purpose indicator 53 blinks the lamp during the change to indicate that the change is occurring, and displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game after a predetermined time. In addition, the general-purpose display indicator 56 displays the number of stored memories (= reservation number) of the general-purpose start gate 34, which is a change start condition of the general-purpose display 53, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 hold display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the winning prize balls to the start winning opening 36 which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display 51 by a plurality of LEDs. It is indicated by turning off, blinking, and lighting. The special figure 2 hold display 55 indicates the number of start memories (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (ordinary change winning device 37), which is a change start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off a plurality of LEDs, Display by blinking and lighting.

  The first game state display section (right strike notification section) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the left strike is more advantageous to the player than the right strike (normal strike). If the player is in a gaming state in which right-handing is more advantageous to the player than left-handing (right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display section (time saving state notification section) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp in a normal game state where no time saving state occurs (when the variable time reduction function is not activated). When the time reduction state occurs (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The third game state display section (probability state display section) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp if the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable change state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not performed, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn on the light. The round display section may be constituted by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The CPU 110 operates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. In other words, it is a backup storage unit that can retain the data stored by the game control device 100 even when the power is off. When the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage unit. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or non-reach variable display game (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines whether the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game or the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state). State), the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of stored start times, and the like, and any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected. To get. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A constitutes a change distribution information obtaining means for obtaining any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, It is connected to a gate switch 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, and a special winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the normal figure starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when detecting an abnormality of the sensor or the switch are input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124 is a setting value change unit serving as a detection unit for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value of a special result in the special figure change display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

  The setting key switch 152 detects an operation of a setting key operation unit which is a first operation unit among the operation units. The setting key operation unit includes a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that the switch has been turned to the second position. The switch is turned on when the switch is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

  The set value change switch 151 detects an operation of a set value change button which is a second operation unit of the operation unit. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and is turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

  By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is determined in the game. Is being used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to the respective probability setting values are 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/280 in setting 5, and 1/280 in setting 6. 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is ten times the probability value in the normal probability state.

  When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by pressing the set value change button in this probability set value changed state. The selected probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

  When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit being turned to the second position in a state where the front frame 12 is closed, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on after the game machine is turned on. When it is turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is set in which the probability setting value cannot be changed.

  The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability set values with numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that can recognize the probability setting value. In addition, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability setting value may be indicated by a lighting mode, an emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs. Alternatively, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the information of the probability set value may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. In this case, while the operation relating to the probability set value is being performed (probability set value change state, probability set value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability set value is displayed, and otherwise, the calculated base value and the ratio of the accessory Give priority to display.

  In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability set value display device 153, and the like, and the game control device 100 uses the probability value used for the lottery of the special figure change display game. The setting means makes it possible to select a probability set value to which is assigned from among a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, a setting unit may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, an operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub-board may be used. The probability set value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the set value change switch 151 or the set key switch 152, and the determined result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to a not-shown test test device via the relay substrate 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). Out ball detection switch signal (based on detection by an out switch detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished playing). The first input port 122 is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 is provided via the data bus 140 takes in the Ku signal).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited institution (not shown), a signal indicating the jackpot probability state, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (generic solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. Is provided with a second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data. Further, the second output port 134 outputs display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

  The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output section 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability set value display device 153 that displays the selected probability set value.

  Further, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 is output to the output unit 130. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fifth method for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying the display data on the status display device 160 is described. Driver 138e is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and stores stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a timekeeping unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, and the like) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processes such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the provided board effect device 44 (for example, a movable role or the like that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a production device) or the like, and a movable production member that performs a production of a game including a special figure variable display game by a movable production member that operates. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the input and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, the cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of directional change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35. The player wins the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening that has been won are given to the payout control device 200 ( The glass unit 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 from the payout unit controlled by the control unit (see FIG. 3).

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact switch for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit inside passes through the ordinary start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, the general figure starting memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four If it is less than ()), the number of ordinary figure start storages is added (+1) and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the general-purpose starting prize is displayed on the general-purpose reserve display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the random number value (hit random number value) for judging to determine the result of the general figure change display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the general figure start storage. Is to be done.

  Then, when there is a general-figure start memory and the general-figure fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the general-figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the general-figure fluctuation display game hits, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first map stored in the first place is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the first game. Then, a process of starting the normal figure change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the general-figure variation display game wins, and a specific result mode (general-figure specific result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined variation time on a general-purpose indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general-purpose variation display game. After performing the general-floating display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, a process of displaying a general-floor display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is fluctuated for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may comprise.

  In the case where the result of the normal symbol change display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is any one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which forms a special result mode is displayed on the general symbol display 53 in accordance with the type of hit. At the same time as the stop display, the control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above, by operating the general-purpose solenoid 37c. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general-figure variation display game is out of control, a control is performed on the general-purpose display 53 to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the out-of-position.

  The winning ball in the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 switch 37a respectively provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning port 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). At the same time, the second start memory, which is the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as starting storage information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of the start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as display. The information is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  Then, when the first special figure change display game or the second special figure change display game is ready to be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first special figure change display game in the earliest start memory corresponding to the start special figure change display game. The determined random number for big hit determination is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set in accordance with the probability setting value, and processing for determining a hit or miss of the special figure change display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variable display game to be executed.

  Then, when executing the first special figure change display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) for a predetermined change time. After the special figure 1 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. When the second special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) for a predetermined variation time. After the special figure 2 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  In the effect control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numerals, symbols, and characters) are displayed on the display device 41 (variable display device) corresponding to the special figure variable display game. A process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game for varyingly displaying symbols and the like is performed. In addition, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special design (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like on the display device 41 is displayed in the left variation display region (first special design) and the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify (high-speed fluctuation). Then, the symbols fluctuating after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. This is performed by displaying the result of the special figure change display game in a result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest.

  Then, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state and a small hitting game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding thereto also becomes the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

  In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, to play the game into the large winning opening. Control to enable the inflow of the ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or until a predetermined opening possible time elapses after the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) of continuing (repeat) this predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game is in the high probability state based on the result mode of the special figure change display game, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game do not change. Both of the variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high probability state, second operation state) as the game state after the end of the special game state. It has become. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the ordinary figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state. That is, the operation state of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is controlled in one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which a prize is easier than the first operation state. .

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-floor display game (normal-figure fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure fluctuating display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first stop symbol (normal electric opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (ordinary power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit stop symbol (ordinary power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure open time are appropriately set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the above-described general-purpose variation display game to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is set to be shorter than the first stop time). 704 ms). Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal power release time) is changed to the second state in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of the general public opening, the general electric opening time, and the general probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure change display may be performed independently or not simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed independently and not simultaneously. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure change display game is executed with priority over the first special figure change display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, and when the execution of the special figure change display game becomes possible, the second special figure change display game is executed. It is executed (prioritized). In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the special winning port switch. 38a, the out switch for detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished the game is provided with a coil for detecting magnetism, and the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. , A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, a micro switch having mechanical contacts is provided for a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 or the like. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, a process for inhibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of an area for saving. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step S4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Accordingly, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to calculate the check data excluding a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  The third input port 124 receives a signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and a signal from the body frame opening detection switch. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on, and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 forms an opening / closing detection unit capable of detecting the opening / closing state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the front frame 12 is opened and the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is set. Becomes When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position and the set value change button is pressed, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the opening of the front frame 12 is a condition.

  By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the elapse of the standby time, it is necessary to keep operating the set value change button from the time the power is turned on until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on cannot be accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (Step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (Steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all output ports (sets no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 forms a validity determining unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit at power-on is valid. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the state is the probability set value change state (step S21). In the case of the probability set value change state, it can be determined from the fact that the probability set value changing flag is set.

  If the state is the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, where the RAM is initialized and the probability set value is changed to a probability set value change state. Here, it is determined that the probability set value is being changed when the power is turned off and the data in the RAM is normally backed up while the probability set value is being changed. It is set to the value change state. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

  In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability set value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for status display are set in order from the top. In the area for the probability set value, a probability set value area for storing information on the currently set probability set value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability set value are set. Is done. The work area includes a work probability set value area for storing information on the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for the initial value random number, a large hit symbol initial value random number, a small hit symbol initial value random number, a hit initial value random number, and a hit symbol initial value random number which are updated as needed are stored. In addition, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated as needed are stored in the area for the fluctuation pattern random numbers. In the area for game control, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored, and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for state display, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a ratio of the accessory, and the like, and a stack area are set.

  The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by an out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and completed the game, and the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the ratio of the bonuses is, during the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending), of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. This is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of balls obtained for each role) (so-called continuous ratio of ratios) obtained by winning the special winning opening in the special winning opening, and information necessary to display the ratio of the role. Includes, for example, information on the total number of awarded balls (total number of awarded balls) and information on the number of awarded balls (the number of acquired balls for each role).

  The RAM clear start address 2 is a start address of an area for an initial value random number. By performing a process of clearing the RAM with this address set, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, The game control area is cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clearing target. A RAM clear start address 1 described later is a start address of a probability set value area. By performing a process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the probability set value area, an initial value random number, and the like are set. Area, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared. Further, a RAM clear start address 3 to be described later is a start address of a game control area. By performing a process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the game control area is cleared. Become.

  It should be noted that the status display area is determined to be valid in the status display edit output process in the timer interrupt process described later and is initialized when abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal In the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 set in this case is set, the area for status display may be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 is set, all the areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

  In the checksum calculation processing in step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the game control work area. Note that one or more of a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a fluctuation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a state display area may be targeted. When a plurality of areas are targeted, the checksum of each area may be calculated separately, and the validity may be individually determined. The determination may be made collectively.

  If the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the state of the third input port 124 previously read (step S23). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, in which a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value to a probability set value change state are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 previously read. Then, it is determined whether the set value change switch is on (step S24).

  If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (Step S24; N), the process proceeds to Step S30, and the processing in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed. If the setting value change switch is ON (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 transmits data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Is an initialization means for initializing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (Step S16; N or Step S17; N), and when it is determined that the checksums do not match (Step S19; N), Step S25 is performed. Then, the process of initializing all the RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when the RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

  First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is open (step S26). If the main body frame is open (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the state of the third input port 124 previously read (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, in which a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value to a probability set value change state are performed. As will be described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the initial value random number are set. , The area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. Note that the area for state display may also be initialized here.

  When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (Step S27; N) or when the main body frame is not in the open state (Step S26; N), the command of the setting change instruction (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), prohibits RAM access (step S29), stops control, and waits for power-off of the gaming machine. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and operates the panel effect device 44 based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction. Then, a notification that prompts the user to change the probability setting value is issued by outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. This notification is continued until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

  In this case, after turning off the power of the gaming machine, turning on the power again with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 being opened, the setting key is set in the process of step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), and the process shifts to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability set value to a probability set value change state. When the control is stopped in step S29, without turning off the power of the gaming machine, the front frame 12 is not opened or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the transition to the probability set value changing state cannot be performed, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

  Note that the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, but the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the notification may be performed in the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100, and the display not used as identification information is performed in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Alternatively, a display for notifying an abnormality may be provided.

  In step S30 of FIG. 6 as a process in the case of normal recovery from a power failure, an initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in an area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area in the RWM where the game state is stored is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variable display game is the high probability state (step S31).

  Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), the process skips steps S32 and S33 and shifts to step S34. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error display) provided on the game board 30 is provided. (ON) data is saved in the segment area (step S33).

  Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demonstration command when in a customer waiting state, a recovery screen command otherwise) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information that is the information of the selected probability set value to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform an effect according to the probability set value, or to perform a game effect according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value, such as changing the selection probability.

  The screen designation command transmits a command according to the restarted game state. When restarting the special figure fluctuation display game interrupted by the power cutoff due to the restart of the control, a restoration screen command serving as restoration information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, in this case, information relating to the result of the special figure variable display game to be restarted is also transmitted. Further, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, a customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Also, when restarting the special game state interrupted by the power cutoff with the restart of the control, a special game state restart command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

  In step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as a process of initializing the RAM and bringing the probability set value into a changeable probability set value state. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). If the backed up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear start address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the status display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number need not be cleared.

  On the other hand, when the backed-up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability set value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number are set. And the game control areas (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. That is, the game control device 100 forms an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). Note that the area for state display may also be initialized here.

  The area to be initialized is an area where a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, 0 is set in the area for the probability set value, so that the probability set value is set to 1. By setting the probability setting value having the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize damage to the game store even when the RAM is cleared due to abnormality or fraud. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

  After that, a probability set value changing flag is set as a process for setting a probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the state is changed to the probability set value change state. Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S38). This makes it possible to display information on the currently set probability set value on the probability set value display device 153.

  Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and a command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). Then, control goes to a step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the A notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is issued by an operation, sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM has been initialized, a command for initializing the RAM is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, the security signal may be output for a predetermined time by setting a timer, or the security signal may be output continuously during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Here, since the RAM has not been initialized, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

  In addition, as a process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, a RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and initialization is performed. The initial value at the time of initializing the RAM is saved in the area to be processed (step S43). As a result, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial values are saved. A timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 forms an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

  Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 suspension number command, the special figure 2 suspension number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, the RAM initialization A plurality of commands, such as an initialization command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demonstration screen and notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information that is the information of the selected probability set value to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform an effect according to the probability set value, or to perform a game effect according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value, such as changing the selection probability.

  In step S45, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) A predetermined value of RWM is used as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), a random number for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol (hit random number), and a random number for determining the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol (hit symbol random number). After saving in the area (step S47), an interrupt is permitted (step S48). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update processing, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure change display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a special figure change display. It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a small hit stop symbol of the game. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the ordinary figure variation display game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a stop symbol of the ordinary figure variation display game. Is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit. Some gaming machines do not have a winning symbol initial value random number depending on the model.

  Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which a start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Note that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure is detected. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number updating process (step S49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S49 includes a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S53) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

  Then, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off (step S57) and a process of saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (set value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization operation unit. Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and reading the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time. Becomes

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

  In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process may return to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeatedly performed until the setting key switch is turned on. . That is, the control of the game may be stopped, and the control may wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 instead of the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, when the state in which the processes of steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be shut off.

  Here, the condition for shifting to the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is open and the setting key switch is on, The open state of the frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as conditions, or the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as a condition.

  Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the probability set value change state only on condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state without the setting key switch. That is, when the processing of steps S22 and S23 is not performed and the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the processing may shift to step S35 in FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. By ending without setting or by setting the same probability setting value and ending, it is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control. If the transition to the probability set value change state is made only on condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be used.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control, and a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is allocated are stored in an operation unit (a set key operation unit (a set key switch 152), a set value change button (a set value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is capable of holding the stored contents even in the power-off state (RAM 111C). ), Validity determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means at power-on is valid, and selecting a probability set value. Initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is not valid by the validity determination means In such a case, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state. When the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game arcade is also lost, and the initial value is set. However, the initialization that is performed by prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the probability that the probability setting value that the gaming shop does not intend remains from being set.

  The control unit is configured to be in a state where a probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage unit is determined by the validity determination unit. If it is determined that the setting is not valid, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on information from the game control means, the game control means, When the validity determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means On the basis of the reception of the notification, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect to continue to select the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game store is set by the initialization.

  Further, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value. A control means (game control device 100) and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned are stored in a first operation unit (a setting key operation unit (a setting key switch 152)) and a second operation unit (a setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value changing switch 151), and the control means can retain the stored contents even in a power-off state. If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, recovery is performed based on the information stored in the storage unit, and the power is turned on. Sometimes, when the first operation unit is operated, a changeable state is set in which the probability setting value can be changed by the setting unit. This means that the means is initialized. Therefore, the change of the probability set value and the operation of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, and the operation efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  The setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability set value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  Further, the control means includes a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on is valid, and the validity determination means stores the information in the storage means. If it is determined that the information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification for prompting initialization of the storage unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state.

  When the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the control unit sets a changeable state in which the setting unit can change the probability set value, and initializes the storage unit. If the validity determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation section is not operated, the first operation section is operated. That is, the notification that prompts the user to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state.

  Further, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value. A control means (game control device 100) and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned are assigned to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change The setting means (game control device 100) which enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the switches 151)) and the control means including the information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means are required for controlling the game. Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information, wherein the control means is provided when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units is operated. Storage means so that the was is initialized. Therefore, the change of the probability set value and the operation of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, and the operation efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. When the signal of the firing stop is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to the enabled state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which is the target of the initial value random number update process, 1. A random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of Tokuzu 2 is performed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a shown in FIG. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for performing a front frame or a glass frame is not opened.

  Next, a probability set value change process (step S108) for performing a process related to change and confirmation of the probability set value is performed, and it is determined whether the state is the probability set value changed state (step S109). In the case of the probability set value change state, it can be determined from the fact that the probability set value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

  If the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), payout command transmission processing (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processings to the payout control device 200 as processing relating to the progress of the game. A special figure game process (step S112) for performing a process related to the figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S113) for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the state is the probability set value change state (step S109; Y) or when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above-described processing regarding the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be advanced.

  Note that in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission processing (step S111), the special figure game processing (step S112), and the general figure game processing (step S113) are not performed. However, it may be performed for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission processing (step S111) may be performed, and the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability set value change state, the random number update processing 1 (step S105) and the random number update processing 2 (step S106) are not performed, and in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the random number is not updated. You may do it. Further, the type of processing that is not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114) for driving the segment LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Fraud monitoring process (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the controller and determining whether there is any abnormality, and fraudulent radio wave for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. (Step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output processing, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is obtained (step S143). S144). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to the digit / external information output port. 136 (step S146).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). Thereby, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by the dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", and "big hit signal 3" 4), the data of the “symbol confirmation frequency signal”, the data of the “start-up signal”, and the data of the “main prize ball signal” and the output data of the firing permission (step S150). It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information and the emission permission signal (step S151).

  Next, off output data of probability set value display is set as display content on the probability set value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether a probability set value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability set value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability set value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability set value.

  If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as a probability setting value display. Output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

  Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded from the probability set value display data area as test signal output data. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value in the test signal to the test shooting device, the data for display of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the process and allows accurate information to be output without changing the information on the probability set value. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

  Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S162). If not (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Thereafter, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission processing, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball which is an area to be used and for which a main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

Each of the winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in the present embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count value of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more untransmitted signals may be transmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three winning ball counter areas, the ten winning ball counter areas, and the fourteen winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1. Each of the three prize ball counter areas, the ten prize ball counter areas, and the fourteen prize ball counter areas in the winning number counter area 2 is configured to store up to 255 wins.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 to repeat the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the value is equal to or greater than 0 (step S189; Y), the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, each time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the output count of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the result of the subtraction is saved in the award ball remaining area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing for transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. Is done. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted every timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out the prize ball. When it is in the state, a payout command is transmitted. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, so that the useless processing is performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the ON state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, during a ball lending operation, during a shot ball out error, during an overflow error, during a frame radio wave illegal occurrence, during a payout ball detection switch (paid out). Counting the number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a dropped ball, during an underpayment error, during an overpayment error (the number of unpaid award balls = the number of remaining game balls) ) (When it is not 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

  When there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and repeats the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the prize ball command is issued.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the prize that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side. It is possible to realize accurate payout control without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control apparatus 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Further, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can output the prize ball. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed comprehensively, and the game balls are transferred to the winning areas (starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) provided in the game area 32. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. 200), and the game control means pays out a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. Control to transmit to the means, if a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. Payment A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means being continuously output for a predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. That is what you are doing.

  In the game area 32, a plurality of prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, special variable prize apparatus 38) are provided, and a game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball is provided for each number of prize balls, and a state signal can start payout control. When there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal is transmitted to the payout control means. The determination as to whether or not the payout control can be started is performed prior to the determination as to whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on a prize of a game ball in a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, special variable prize apparatus 38). And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means controls the payout command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether the payout control can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) to be transmitted to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a predetermined prize area. The gaming machine External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the unit, wherein the external information output means determines whether or not the status signal output from the payout control means allows the payout control means to start payout control Irrespective of the above, the prize ball signal is output.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined prize area (starting prize port 36, ordinary fluctuation prize apparatus 37, general prize port 35, special fluctuation port) A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is supplied to the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), And the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and can play the game in the predetermined prize area. Ball prize In addition, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, updating when a game ball is awarded in the predetermined winning area, and accumulating the number of winning balls by an external information output means. By performing the update in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the accumulation processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the scheduled number of game balls to be paid becomes ten, and the number of game balls paid out is ten from the payout control device 200. , A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of times of output of the main prize ball number signal by +1 (a subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every ten payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of times of output.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the plan and the result can be matched. It can respond to improper payment. In addition, even if a prize is won during the jackpot, the payout is delayed due to lack of a ball or the like, and even if the payout is made after the end of the jackpot, the hall con (hole computer) can be accurately determined by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (determined).

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In the winning port switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the state is the probability set value change state (step S299). In the case of the probability set value change state, it can be determined from the fact that the probability set value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

  If the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processing after step S301 is performed as processing relating to the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the state is the probability set value change state (step S299; Y) or when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. In other words, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be performed without performing the process related to winning.

  In the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal variable winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and a winning port that can always win. Is not monitored, but it may be performed for one or more of them. For example, the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing that is not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

  In step S301, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the winning opening switches 38a in the winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). An illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor the winning opening for an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating a position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to a target switch, a lower address of illegal monitoring information, a lower address of an illegal winning number area, an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning The upper limit of the number (the number of fraud occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning opening monitoring table includes, in addition to the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning opening switch 38a in the winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the winning opening is not opened even if the opening is not open. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step S304) is performed to monitor the mouth for illegal winning and detect a normal winning.

  Next, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S305), and even if the public telephone is not open, it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning in the public telephone. Then, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning port monitoring table for a winning port switch (for example, the starting port 1 switch 36a or the winning port switch 35a for the general winning port 35) that can always win is prepared (step S307), and the winning counter is updated to update the winning number. The processing (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals whose status is to be monitored and which of the signals is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as an occurrence of an error is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the payout abnormal status signal is set. You.

  Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 so that if the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is “1”, state monitoring based on a signal output from the body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is performed. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine for determining whether an error has occurred or not is determined. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality that is output due to occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define the case where the state scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is “0”, so that the processing is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 ms.

[Probability set value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability set value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the probability set value changing process, first, it is determined whether the state is the probability set value changed state (step S401). Is performed (step S422), and the probability set value changing process ends.

  If the probability setting value change state is present (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. . If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the information of the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output processing described above (see FIG. 8). If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output processing described above.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The changed probability set value is a state in which a probability setting value to be used in a game is newly set by performing a determination operation described later, and in this case, the probability set value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

  Then, in determining whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability set value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

  If there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value of the work probability set value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0-5. The values of 0 to 5 in the work probability set value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6 respectively, and the value of the work probability set value area is updated by +1 each time the set value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value changes sequentially. When the value of the work probability set value area is updated by +1 when the value is 5, the value returns to 0. Also, at this stage, only the value of the work probability set value area is changed, and the value of the probability set value area storing the probability set value used for the game does not change. The probability set value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability set value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is six here, other numbers may be used.

  Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the work probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S408). Thereby, the data displayed on the probability set value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability set value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). Thereby, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the set value change button, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is turned off, a blank display is displayed, and the information of the new probability set value is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated.

  Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, in the case where the display of the probability set value is performed using numbers 1 to 6, a display other than the numbers may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability set value. When the display of the probability set value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability set value may be blinked as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which the display is blinked, a display mode in which the cycle of blinking is different from that in the case of non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from that in the case of not the specific display. .

  In addition, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the panel effect device 44 The specific notification, which is the notification that the selected probability set value has been changed, may be performed by the operation described above, sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. That is, the specific notification may be performed together with or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability set value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 display 51, and the special figure 2 display.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting a contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is a contact. If there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), the probability set value change processing ends. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is loaded and saved in the probability set value area (step S412). Thereby, the selected probability set value is set as the probability set value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a determination operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be set as the finalizing operation, and an operation unit for the finalizing operation may be provided in the setting unit.

  After that, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S413). Next, a probability set value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability set value change process ends. . The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and controls the display of the panel effect device 44 based on the reception of the command for changing the probability set value. The fact that the probability set value has been changed is notified by operation, sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

  On the other hand, if the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is at the second position, the probability setting value change processing ends. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and the clear target is set. Is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

  As a result, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. A timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the status display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may be cleared. Also, in the probability set value area, the area related to the change work, such as a work probability set value area for temporarily storing information on the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state and various flags, is cleared. You. Therefore, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability set value display device 153 ends. Further, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

  Next, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (step S420), and a command to end the change of the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S421), and the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and controls the display of the panel effect device 44 based on the reception of the command for changing the probability set value. A notification that the change of the probability set value has been completed is given by an operation, a sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as notification that the RAM has been initialized.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, the probability setting A plurality of commands, such as a change end command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The probability setting change end command may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information that is the information of the selected probability set value to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform an effect according to the probability set value, or to perform a game effect according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or reports a probability set value, such as changing the selection probability.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for providing a player with a gaming value, Based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), a plurality of types of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery are assigned are set. Setting means (game control device 100) that allows the user to select from the list, the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, and When the display of the display unit is updated in response to the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

  Further, the setting means displays a display which is not used as the display of the information of the probability set value as the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

  Also, the setting means displays the updated information as a specific display in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period for a certain period. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows a probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability set value confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. When the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag during the probability set value confirmation mode is set.

  If the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S433).

  The game being played is a case in which the special figure change display game is being executed, the general figure change display game is being executed, the special game state is being performed, or the general figure is being hit. That is, this is a case where the state of the game is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the game is being played, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, information indicating that the game cannot be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect may be notified.

  Note that conditions for determining that a game is being played (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. During the execution of the special figure change display game, during the execution of the normal figure change display game, during the special game state, or one of a plurality of states selected from among the hit states of the general figure, conditions may be used. It may be determined that the game is being played if the situation corresponds to either the execution of the variable display game or the special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is being played and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  Further, even if a game ball is detected by an out switch that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and the game has been completed, it is determined that the game is being played for a predetermined period and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is being played, and the mode may not be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, during the power saving mode in which a transition is made when a certain period of time elapses in a state in which no game is played, the transition to the probability set value confirmation mode may not be performed. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

  If the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to be in the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. If the setting key switch is ON (step S434; Y), the flag in the probability set value confirmation mode is set (step S435), and the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability set value check mode is started, and information on the currently set probability set value is displayed as a display on the probability set value display device 153.

  After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), a command during the confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is performed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, The fact that the probability set value is being confirmed is notified by the operation of the device 44, the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S439). If the setting key switch is on (step S439; Y), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

  If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the flag in the probability set value confirmation mode is cleared (step S440), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Then, a command to end the probability set value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the reception of the command for ending the probability set value confirmation.

  That is, the probability set value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and is ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the state is changed to the probability setting value change state.

  As described above, by setting the setting key switch to the ON state during the game and not shifting to the probability set value check mode, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. It should be noted that, while the game is being played, even if the setting key switch is turned on, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode. When it becomes, it shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

  In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode is set to a game, but the condition is not limited to this. The transition to the probability set value confirmation mode is performed according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. What is necessary is to select whether or not to perform. For example, when the state is the high probability state, the mode may not be shifted to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as described later, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode may not be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value is provided with A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)). In the case where the state of the game controlled by the control unit is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the confirmation state, Work unit is that it has not to a confirmation state be a predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode in accordance with the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by indicating the probability set value.

  The prohibited state is a state where the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  The prohibited state is a state in which a special game state is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  Further, a normal variable winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be easily won, and which can generate a right to execute a game by winning, and a predetermined condition being satisfied. A general state game (a general state change display game) is executed on the basis of the above, and when the result of the general state game is a specific result, the normal state change winning device 37 is converted to the open state. A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which a general-purpose game is being executed or in a hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  The setting unit sets the operation unit to a predetermined state in a state in which the state of the game controlled by the control unit is a prohibition state, and when the prohibition state ends with the predetermined state, the prohibition state of the prohibition state is set. The confirmation state is set based on the end. Therefore, when the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 serving as the second starting port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and special features based on the winning are obtained. At the stage before the start of the figure change display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the change of the special figure change display game are performed. A special map ordinary process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A7, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. The processing during the fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the big winning opening and the big hit end processing are executed. A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hitting A small hit fanfare medium process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "8" in step A7, a small hitting middle process (step A16) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. .
If the special figure game processing number is "9" in step A7, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining sphere winning in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing, and the small hit ending processing Small ball remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the processing.
If the special figure game processing number is "10" in step A7, a small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), a symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. . After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) relating to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. Then, the special figure game process ends. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a first starting port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize in the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is during working hours (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. An effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the case of the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the first starting port receives a prize during the time-saving state (ie, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to issue a notification (warning) to instruct the right control to be performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first starting port (start winning port 36) (step A107), a special process for a special figure starting port switch (step A108) is performed.

Next, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether there is a prize in the second starting port. A determination is made (step A111).
In step A111, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second opening (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is operating, that is, the normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step is performed. The process proceeds to A114 to perform the subsequent processes. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a regular electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not an irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that a fraud has occurred if the number of illegal winnings in the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In step A113, if it is determined that normal telephone fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The startup port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the startup port switch monitoring process ends. If it is determined in step A113 that irregularities in the ordinary telephone are occurring (step A113; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the non-winning information of the monitoring target start port among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 by the game machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

  In addition, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1 ( (Step A136), and save the target starting port winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition processing is stored in the RWM. Save to the area (step A139). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) has been won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), an effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting winning opening 36 or the starting region of the normal variable winning device 37, and starts the variable display game execution right. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as storage. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) in the above-described startup port switch common processing will be described. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting port winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is checked to determine whether or not the first starting port (starting winning port 36) is a winning. (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not made to the first starting port (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special figure is being shortened (step A152).

In step A152, when it is determined that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special figure is not working (step A152; N), it is determined whether a large hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not being performed or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the result of the determination is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random numbers is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) has been won (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A158; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not the small hit has occurred. If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common processing is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (Step A162), and the process proceeds to Step A164.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A166). A167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A169), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 which are executed at the start of the special figure change display game in the special figure ordinary processing. That is, the determination according to the set probability set value is performed. The special figure information setting processing in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A167 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

(Normal processing of special maps)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 suspension number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A305). When it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is “0” (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309). A309; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to the special figure ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure ordinary processing is ended. That is, when the special figure change display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, a customer waiting demonstration command serving as standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, in step A309, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309; Y), the process shifts to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

If the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” in step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step A302). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 change start processing (step A304) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.
If the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” in step A305 (step A305; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A306). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 change start processing (step A308) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  As described above, the check of the special figure 2 reservation number is performed before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, so that if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A304) Will be executed. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A308) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discriminating area (step A321). In order to determine whether or not the first special figure change display game is a small hit, the slip information and the big hit information are set in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the special figure change display game is a big hit. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A332). Here, 100 ms is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, “0”) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A304) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 2 change start processing is processing to be performed at the start of the second special figure change display game, and the same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. This is performed for storage.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, first, a special figure 2 change flag indicating the type of special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the change symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step A352). Here, 100 ms is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, “0”) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ends.

  In the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing, when a change pattern of the special figure change display game is selected, information on the set probability set value may be referred to. This makes it possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies a probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing performed in the big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A381). An upper limit determination value table is provided for each probability setting value, and defines an upper limit determination value in a high probability state and an upper limit determination value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability set value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value, the big hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

  Next, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability set value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is made different depending on the probability set value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, as in the case of the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used according to the probability state is selected. And set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Note that the loss in step A389 means that the hit is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that a small hit is determined in a small hit determination process later. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (step A384). When the state is the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value during the high probability is obtained (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387). ). If the state is not the high-probability state (step A384; N), an upper-limit judgment value during low-probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper-limit judgment value (step A387). . The upper limit determination value obtained here is obtained with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing performed in the big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability setting value. In addition, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether the state is the high probability state. In addition, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value at the same probability setting value do not overlap. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

  Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. By setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting values are different. When the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

  Note that, similarly to the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit determination value may be obtained from the set upper limit determination value table. Alternatively, the upper limit determination value in the big hit determination and the small hit upper limit determination value in the small hit determination may be defined collectively in a determination value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be made different depending on the probability setting value. To select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

  The probability setting value referred to in the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) are shown. When the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, the setting may be performed as a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1). The game may be stopped and an error notification may be given. Further, the probability setting value is referred to for each of the big hit determination and the small hit determination, but when the probability set value is set in the probability set value change state, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability set value is set. Alternatively, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may be referred to only when determining a big hit or a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to a changing symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 changing flag or special figure 2 changing flag) is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting is performed. The processing is performed (step A602). That is, a symbol stop command as stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variable time of the running special figure variable display game ends and the result is derived and displayed. In response to the reception of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuating display of the fancy special figure fluctuating display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuating display game and stops and displays the result.

  Thereafter, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be varied depending on the stop symbol pattern. . That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Next, a process number “2” relating to the process of displaying a special figure is set as a process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in a special figure game process number area (step A606).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 2 (eg, the special symbol) 2 The signal during fluctuation is turned off) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initialized in the symbol determination number signal control timer area relating to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. The value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as a control information of the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display unit 51, a stop flag related to a change stop on the special figure 1 display unit 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A610). ), As a control information for the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), the special figure changing process ends.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM A process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (the special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variable display game is started. (For example, turning on the condition device operating signal, turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 in step A705, if it is determined that the big hit is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and it is a big hit (step A706). If it is determined to be A706; Y), a test signal (for example, a signal during the operation of the condition device is turned ON, a signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned on, The signal per special symbol (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. (Step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716). A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when a big hit with a payout (a big win opening information other than the big win opening information 1) is ON, and a big hit without a payout (a so-called sudden big hit, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is ON when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the hit is a big hit with a payout, and is OFF when the hit is a big hit without a payout.

  After that, the special winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning as a result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the mouth unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, a fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in one of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. A special game state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability change count area for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in the high probability state is set. Is performed (step A726) to update the value (number of high-probability fluctuations), and effect mode information check processing for setting the effect mode (step A727), and the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high. It is determined whether the state is the probability state (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in a high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A729), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the flow shifts to a process of step A733. The small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in the high probability state (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variable display game is the high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is determined by the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so that the user is not conscious of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, “7” related to the small hit fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (big hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal related to the start of the small hitting game (for example, a special symbol 1 small hitting signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A739), and the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the display LED during right-handed use (eg, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of times of the high probability change for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in the high probability state is determined. High-probability-variation-number update processing (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high-probability-variation number), effect-mode information check processing for effect mode setting (step A744), and switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to the effect mode number The number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the plurality of effect modes. (The number of rotations) or the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; N), "0" is set as the process number for the special figure ordinary process (step A749). ), The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A750), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the special figure displaying process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A746 that the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the production command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step A748), the flow shifts to the processing of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, control of the entire processing relating to the general-figure variation display game, setting of the general-figure display, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the general-figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the general-figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the general-figure fluctuation display game are set. A general routine (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In addition, when the general-figure game processing number is “1” in step B7, the general-figure change processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display processing is performed.

Also, in step B7, if the general-figure game processing number is “2”, if the result of the general-figure change display game is a hit, setting of the general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect Also, a general-figure displaying process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general-floor hitting process is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general figure game processing number is "3", the general figure regular processing is continued or the information necessary for performing the general electric remaining ball processing is set. The processing (step B11) is performed.

If the general-purpose game processing number is "4" in step B7, the general-purpose remaining sphere process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose end process is performed.
If the general-figure game processing number is "5" in step B7, a general-figure-per-stop processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure normal processing is performed.

Then, after preparing a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), a symbol variation control process (step B14) relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general symbol indicator 53 is performed. B15) is performed, and the ordinary map game process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301), and when the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301; Y). ) Sets “0”, which is related to the ordinary drawing ordinary processing, as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), random numbers are loaded from the winning random number storage area of RWM (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1), The loaded areas, that is, the winning random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is reduced. It is determined whether the normal figure high probability is higher than the normal probability (that is, the normal figure low probability), that is, whether it is in the time saving state (step B303).

If it is not during the high figure probabilities (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower judgment value) at the time of the low figure probabilities is set (step B304), and if the high figure probabilities are high (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower-limit judgment value (high-probability lower-limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is determined in step B304 or B305. (Step B307).

If the value of the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag is set. Loss information is saved in the area (step B308), a loss stop symbol number is set (step B309), the loss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is stopped. The image is saved in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hit at the time of low probability of public figure is 0/251, the probability of hit at the time of high probability of public figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”. Therefore, at the time of the low probability of the normal figure, the value is shifted when the value of the hit random number is all “0” to “250”. In addition, at the time of the high probability of the normal figure, the case where the value of the random number is one of “1” to “250” is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number is “0” is a miss.
In the case of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). In other words, the process of raising the rank of the number of reserved general figure holdings 2 to 4 that are held after the number of reserved general figure 1 by one by one with the execution of the general figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved general figure 1 I do. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number for ordinary figure reservation 1 to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figures 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the reserved number of ordinary figures is decremented by one.

Next, a variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in a general-purpose game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the process for setting the process of shifting to the normal figure is performed (step B321) to shift to the process of changing the normal figure, and the normal process is ended. That is, the game control unit 100 executes the general-figure variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the general-figure start gate 34 (inflow area) (based on the general-figure start memory). Make
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, as the fluctuation time, 500 ms is set with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms is set with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms is set with a probability of 16/256. .

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the general figure changing process, first, the process number is set to “2” related to the general figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the display time of the general-figure display game (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the general-figure display game, is saved in the general-figure game processing timer area (step B403). A signal (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and a stop flag indicating that the general graphic fluctuation display game is stopped is stored in the general graphic fluctuation control flag area. The process is saved (step B405), and the normal-floor fluctuation process ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process of displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the process of displaying a normal figure, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal process of the normal figure is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), "0", which is related to ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B515). B516). Thereafter, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone illegal monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the general figure is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, “0”) corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol information is set. Or "5"), and saves it in the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, “4” or “7”) corresponding to the ordinary figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the ordinary figure end pointer area (step B506). Next, the general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general graphic game processing timer area (step B507).

  Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal-per-prize processing (step B508), and the process number is saved in the general-figure game process number area (step B509). After that, a test signal (for example, an ordinary signal for turning on a normal symbol 1 ON) and a signal for starting a normal power operation (for example, turning ON a normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) for a start of a normal figure change display game are given as test signals. On data is saved in the output data area (step B510), and ON data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid (step B511).

  Further, the information of the general telephone count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the general number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 during the regular illegal monitoring period is stored. The information of the illegal winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag (out-of-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process of displaying the ordinary figure ends.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the mid-summer-time hitting process (step B11) in the above-described normal time game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal time per hit figure processing, first, a normal time per hit figure control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal time per hit figure control pointer is equal to or more than the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer during normal operation is determined (step B603). A branching process according to (value before updating +1 in B603) is performed (step B604).
On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not larger than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process of updating the control pointer area during normal operation in step B603 by +1 is not performed. A branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B604).

  If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2", or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the closing of the normal variable prize device 37. The wait time after the closing of the 37 is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B605), and OFF data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary solenoid 37c (step B606). The middle processing per figure ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37. The general power opening time, which is the release time, is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B607), and the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B608). The middle processing is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to open the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37. The normal power release time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the normal power output data area (step B610) to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c. The process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, in which the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is terminated to perform the ordinary electric sphere processing. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B612), and the general electric power remaining sphere processing time is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B614), and the routine-per-intermediate processing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 300 milliseconds as the wait time in step B605, 1700 milliseconds as the normal power release time in step B607, 2600 milliseconds as the normal power open time in step B609, and step B613. To save 600 msec as the normal sphere processing time.
Further, when the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the process of displaying the ordinary figure, “1700 ms” is acquired as the ordinary power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "1700 msec", so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control signal is updated to "1" during normal time, so that the power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer during normal time is updated to "2" for 300 ms. The wait time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "3" so that the public power is released for 1700 ms, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4" for 600 ms. Is set.

  When the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the process of displaying the ordinary figure, "2600 ms" is acquired as the ordinary power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "2600 msec", and the ordinary power is released for 2600 msec. Then, since the control pointer is "5" per ordinary figure, a 300 ms wait time is given. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal operation, so that the public power is released for 2600 ms, and then the control pointer during the normal operation is updated to "7" for 600 ms. The normal electricity remaining sphere processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a general-purpose game (general-purpose variation display game) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and sets the normal variation winning device 37 to an open state when the result of the general-purpose game is a specific result. A normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a converting hit state (normal drawing hit state) is provided.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) On the basis of the information, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when no glass frame opening error has occurred (step S801; N) and when no main frame opening error has occurred (step S802; N), The off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or if a body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, the security signal control timer is updated by −1 ( Step S807). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the RAM initial value when the RAM processing is started in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809) and step S810 Move to the processing of. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the process of step S810 is skipped without performing the process of step S809. Transition.

  Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), In the case where the illegal operation of the telephone is occurring (step S813; Y), or in the case where the illegal operation of the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). (Step S817), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S818), and the process proceeds to Step S819. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, there is no occurrence of improper magnet (step S810; N), no occurrence of panel radio improperity (step S811; N), no occurrence of frame radio improperity (step S812; N), and no occurrence of general electric fraud. (Step S813; N) If it is not during the occurrence of the special winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
If a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If no switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start-up signal editing process (step S820) for editing a winning signal of the start-up port is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S822).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S822). S824), ends the external information editing process.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 32 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, initialization of the VDP 312 is performed (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and drawing commands. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C16).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, and the like are performed. A decoration control process to be performed (step C18), a movable body control process to control a motor and a solenoid of the board effect device 44 (step C19) are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows a received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Also, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for commanding an operation related to a small hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, or the like). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as the number-of-suspended-number command and the error command. (Step C241). The one-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the look-ahead design-related command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start-up memory (holding) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, the display of the decoration special figure start display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. For example, an effect display is performed. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern or a stop pattern corresponding to a start memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

  For a command related to power-on and a command related to the probability setting value, a corresponding process is performed by a single-shot command process. Commands relating to power-on include a command at the time of restoration from a power failure and a command at the time of RAM initialization. Commands relating to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the change in the probability setting, checking the probability setting value, and ending the setting of the probability setting value.

  In the first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. However, the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. May be changed to the probability set value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized at the end of the probability set value change state, whether the special figure change display game is running, the normal figure change display game is running, the special game state, or the normal figure hit state The condition may not be satisfied. Alternatively, the condition may be that the customer is waiting. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

  Although the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability set value change state ends, the RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the RAM 111C is abnormal.

  Although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting values in the present embodiment. The values in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C take values from 0 to 5. The same applies to the work probability set value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability set values corresponding to the values in the probability set value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in setting 1 to setting 6, respectively.

  FIG. 35B shows an example in which the assignment of the probability values is different. In this example, probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability values in three stages. Except for this, it is the same as FIG. In this way, when the six-stage probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be changed, and the design can be easily changed.

  It is to be noted that which probability value is assigned to which probability value is arbitrary. For example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. By operating the set value change button, the value of the probability set value area (work probability set value area) is updated by +1. Therefore, by changing the assignment, the order of the probability values changed when the set value change button is operated is different. Order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to two probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be four, and any one of one to six stages can be used.

  FIG. 35C also shows an example in which the assignment of the probability values is different. In this example, the settings 4 to 6 in FIG. 35B are changed to the settings 1 to 3 and the display on the probability set value display device 153 is set to 1 to 3 correspondingly. Thereby, the display of the probability set value display device 153 corresponds to the probability value, and the person in charge of the work can easily grasp the probability value.

  FIG. 35D also shows an example in which the assignment of the probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, only one probability value can be set substantially, and even when the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is displayed on the probability set value display device 153. However, the specific display (for example, blank display) is performed as described above, so that the operation is performed. It becomes easier for the worker to understand that the reception has been made.

  Although the number of values in the probability set value area is six, other numbers may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35B and 35C, the number of values in the probability set value area may be three. Also, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability set value area may be one. In addition, the number of values in the probability set value area may be set to 7 or more in order to enable a larger number of stages to be set. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability set value display device 153.

  In addition, although the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability set value, the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is changed in accordance with the change of the probability set value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be determined independently. However, when only a big hit and a small hit are to be obtained as a result of the special figure change display game, it is necessary to set a small hit probability value according to the big hit probability value. In addition, a probability setting value for setting a big hit probability value and a probability setting value for setting a small hit probability value may be separately set. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of a hit result of the normal figure change display game may be set according to a probability set value that defines a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

  In addition, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. Alternatively, the setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has been subjected to termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and reduce costs. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability varying function, an operating probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine according to the present modification, the game control device 100 transmits a command to instruct payout to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

  The payout control device 200 according to the present modified example includes a storage unit that can hold the stored content even when the power is shut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. As described above, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the storage content in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage unit of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means, based on receiving the payout command. In this way, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, thereby preventing the profit of the player from being spoiled. it can.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to notifying that the change of the probability set value is to be performed, the effect that the payout is likely to be performed is also performed. May be. In addition, transmission of the payout command (specific information) to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above-described case. For example, in the case of transmitting a command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. In step S40) or when transmitting a command for initializing the RAM to the effect control device 300 (step S44), a command (specific information) of a payout instruction may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, Game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of a game based on information from the game control means, and a probability value used for a lottery of a game are assigned. Setting means (selection means) for selecting the set probability value from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). A game control device 100) and a payout control device (payout control device 200) for performing control of paying out game media based on payout information from the game control device. A storage unit (RAM 111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is shut off, and a validity determination unit (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on is valid. And initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value, and is stored in the storage means by the validity determination means. When it is determined that the information is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the game control, and the effect control means sets the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is capable of holding the stored contents even in a power-off state, and comprises payout information storage means capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and When signal, and it has to perform control to pay out game media based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to return to a normal state, and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. When the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game arcade is also lost, and the initial value is set. However, the initialization that is performed by prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the probability that the probability setting value that the gaming shop does not intend remains from being set.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability set value are prepared.

[Probability set value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In the probability set value changing process, a fixed condition monitoring process (step S450) for monitoring whether a condition for fixing the selected probability set value is satisfied is performed.

[Fixed condition monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the determination condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end standby flag (step S457), performs the processing of steps S412 to S415, and ends the fixed condition monitoring processing.

  That is, when the operator performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first determination condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end wait flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition, as described later. In this example, the second confirmation condition is satisfied when the first confirmation condition is satisfied on the condition of an input from the touch switch. Is no longer necessary, so that the end standby flag is cleared.

  On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second confirmation condition has already been started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S452).

  If the setting key switch is not in the OFF state (step S452; N), the determination condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability set value change state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).

  Thereafter, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing after step S457 is performed, and the fixed condition monitoring processing ends. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch for performing the second operation, the second determination condition is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability set value selected when either the first fixed condition or the second fixed condition is satisfied is set as the probability set value to be used for the game. Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability set value is stored in the work probability set value area, and the information in the probability set value area in which the probability set value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, if the power is turned off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability set value is discarded, and the original probability set value is set.

  In the probability set value change state, the fact that the selected probability set value is set by touching the operation handle 24 may be notified. This notification may be always performed in the probability set value change state, or may be performed only in the state where the end standby flag is set. Further, the first fixing condition and the second fixing condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be that only the setting key switch is turned off. Alternatively, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and the selected probability setting value may be set when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

  Although the original probability set value is set when the power is turned off before the determination condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability set value may be set. For example, the information of the probability set value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability set value change state, and when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the initial value is set. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value. For example, the same probability setting value as that set when the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is initialized is used. It may be a set value.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151)), wherein the setting means determines that one of the plurality of determination conditions is satisfied. That is, the probability setting value selected on the basis of this is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of determination conditions, the degree of freedom of work is increased, and work efficiency in a game arcade can be increased.

  Further, the setting means does not set the selected probability set value if the power is cut off before any of the plurality of confirmation conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

  In addition, the plurality of determination conditions include a first determination condition and a second determination condition, wherein the first determination condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second determination condition is that the first operation is performed. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not include a setting key operation section in the setting means, and does not include the setting key switch 152. Also, the condition for shifting to the changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed is different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed-up information is normal and the probability set value is not in the changed state (step S21; N), it is determined whether the set value change switch is on from the state of the third input port 124 previously read. Is determined (step S61).

  If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process shifts to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to perform a process when the power supply is normally restored. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), a shift determination process is performed (step S62). As described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether or not a transition condition to a probability set value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, a probability set value changing flag is set. .

  When the probability set value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process proceeds to the process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability set value change state in which the set value can be changed. The process moves to step S35 of No. 6. In this modification, the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination processing, so that the processing in step S37 may not be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S63; N), the process shifts to step S41 in FIG. 6 to perform a process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

  On the other hand, if the backed-up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), it is determined whether the setting value change switch is on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier. Is determined (step S64). If the setting value change switch is not on (step S64; N), a command (specific information) of a setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), and RAM access is prohibited. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  If the setting value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), a shift determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination processing is the same processing as step S62. If the probability set value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), the RAM is initialized and the probability set value change state is set so that the probability set value can be changed. The process moves to step S35 in FIG. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

(Transition determination processing)
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination processing (steps S62 and S65) in the above-described main processing. In this transition determination processing, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

  In the present modified example, the clerk can shift to the probability set value changing state by inserting the game ball into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is changed. It is determined from the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal is input whether the transition condition is satisfied. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability set value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination processing ends. As a result, the state shifts to the probability set value change state.

  If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). . If the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination processing ends. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination processing ends without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 6 in order to initialize the RAM area for game control, and when the backed up data is abnormal, Means that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

  Note that the transition condition may be changeable at the game store or may not be changeable. Further, although the transition condition is such that game balls are put in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in a predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detecting means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, the condition may be that only detection is performed by the detection unit, or that the detection unit performs detection a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (the number of detections, the detection interval, and the like). .

  Further, although the detection sensor for the winning area is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 and the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection unit that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor for a winning area.

  Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition. The transition is performed when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, a keyboard may be provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and may be used as a detection unit used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by a password input from the keyboard. .

  Further, the transition to the probability set value change state is enabled by monitoring the satisfaction of the transition condition only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the game machine is powered on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not in the ON state, the transition to the probability set value change state may be enabled by monitoring the satisfaction of the shift condition. In this case, the period for monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be always set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power-on. May be started to monitor the establishment of.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player, The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are determined. Setting means (gaming control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) And the setting means enables selection of a probability set value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode.Therefore, the detection of the predetermined mode by the detecting means has the same function as the setting key, so that it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can execute the change of the probability set value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the work of changing the probability set value can be simultaneously performed on a plurality of gaming machines. Is improved.

  In addition, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the result of the game is a special result, the game is used in a game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a), and a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned A setting unit (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on operation of an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means is configured to enable selection of a probability set value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. . Therefore, the detection of the predetermined mode by the detecting means has the same function as the setting key, so that it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can execute the change of the probability set value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the work of changing the probability set value can be simultaneously performed on a plurality of gaming machines. Is improved.

  The setting means enables selection of the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

  Further, the plurality of detection means are inoperable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modified example, the change of the probability set value is performed by the set value change operation unit constituted by the dip switch.

  The DIP switch serving as a setting value change operation unit is provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and the input state is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and states of the DIP switches corresponding to the respective probability set values are defined.

[Probability set value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability set value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461). (Step S462). Thereby, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Becomes

  By using the dip switch in this manner, the work of setting a desired probability set value is facilitated, and the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover for covering the DIP switch may be attachable so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately seen when the front frame 12 is opened.

  Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch, and the LED may be turned on when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. The confirmation LED may be lit at all times, or may be lit only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

  Further, the set value change operation unit is not limited to the dip switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary switch, and any type that can grasp the probability set value by visually checking the state of each switch. May be something.

  Further, the probability set value changing state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152, but the state can be shifted to the probability set value changing state according to the state of the set value changing switch 151 as in the third modified example, and the predetermined time is set. The probability set value change state may end when the time elapses. In this case, the probability set value may be set based on the state of the set value change operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the set value change operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. A probability setting value may be set.

  Also, when the state is not the probability set value change state, the currently set probability set value is compared with the state of the set value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether both states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time, such as when power is turned on or when a special figure variation display game is started. Moreover, you may make it perform regularly at fixed time intervals. If it is determined by the monitoring process that the states do not match, a notification that an abnormality has occurred may be made, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game cannot be performed when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 for changing the probability set value and the CPU 111A is broken. .

  In this modified example, a setting sub-board is provided as a setting means including a set value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability set value display device 153, and the like, and the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154. Here, illustration of the set value change switch 151 is omitted.

  FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed, the input to the CPU 111A is set to LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the state is not changed to the probability set value change state, and the game can be advanced. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED is provided as confirmation means for visually recognizing the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

  FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position, and the probability setting value change state is set on condition that the input from the setting key switch 152 is on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes specific operation information that is input based on the operation of the operation unit being set to the specific state, and based on the input of the specific operation information. It becomes a probability set value change state in which a probability set value can be selected. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot be advanced, and the game can be advanced by ending the probability set value change state.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows a case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In any case, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on.

  That is, since the state becomes the same as when the probability set value can be changed, the specific operation information is also input in this case. As a result, the state is changed to the probability set value change state and the game cannot be advanced. As described above, the specific operation information is input even in the case of disconnection or disconnection of the connector, whereby it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of an abnormality. Further, since the confirmation means is turned on even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

  Here, the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 has been described, but they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Also, the setting sub-board, which constitutes the setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like, is provided separately from the game control device 100. However, the setting key switch 152 and the like are provided in the game control device 100 to set the setting means. May be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case as well, it is possible to detect disconnection or disconnection of the connector between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A by a similar configuration.

  Here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted. However, when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is interrupted, the specific operation information is input. Information may be input. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control, and a probability set value which is connected to the control means and to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned, are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151), and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on the fact, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability set value can be selected, and the control means can proceed with the game while the specific operation information is input. It is configured not performed, if the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, so that the specific operation information to the control means has to be entered. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

  Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, the probability set value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, a probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation process, when a game is being played (step S433; Y), the OFF state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. When the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434). When the setting key switch is not on (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. (Step S473), and ends the probability set value confirmation processing. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch is in the off state when the game is not being played.

  If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether there is an OFF state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), and the processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, if there is no off-state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not being played, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode, and the setting key switch is switched from the off state while the game is not being performed. When the state changes to the ON state, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability set value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept on from during the game, the intention during the game in which the transition to the probability set value confirmation mode is prohibited is prohibited. If the setting key switch is in the ON state without being set, it is possible to prevent a state in which the game is not being played thereafter (a state not in the prohibition state) and the mode is shifted to the probability set value check mode and the probability set value is displayed. . That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when operated with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

  As described above, the setting unit (the game control device 100) operates the operation unit (the setting key operation unit (the setting key switch 152)) when the state of the game controlled by the control unit (the game control device 100) is not the prohibited state. That is, the confirmation state is set only when the state is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally indicated.

[Seventh modification]
Next, a seventh variation of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification includes a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit as a first operation unit and a set value change button as a second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. The RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main process, if the RAM clear switch is in the ON state (the RAM clear button is pressed down) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is, the RAM clear switch forms an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability set value change processing]
Also, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 46 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change processing, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processing after step S412 is performed to determine the selected probability setting value. Do.

  As described above, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, and the probability set value can be determined by the RAM clear button. The work of determining the probability set value can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the probability set value change state and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability set value is changed. Since only the initialization of the RAM can be performed without shifting to the state, when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state. Therefore, the work efficiency at the game store can be improved.

  From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch) )), When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated, the storage unit (RAM 111C) ) Can be initialized. Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability set value can be determined.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a player is given a gaming value. A control means (game control device 100) and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to a first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and a second operation unit (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value changing switch 151) and a third operation section (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)); Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for control of the game by the control means including information on the probability set value selected by the means; State, an open state, a main body frame (front frame 12), and open / close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the main body frame. When the game machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated while the open / close detection unit detects that the game machine is in the open state, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is set. Is initialized by the opening / closing detection unit when the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the third operation unit being operated, the probability set value is set. This means that the storage means is initialized without making the change possible. Therefore, when only the initialization of the RAM is desired to be performed, it is not necessary to perform the operation of changing the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved.

  Further, the control means, when the main body frame is in the open state is detected by the open / close detection means, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the first operation part and the third operation part being operated, The probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the main body frame is in the closed state, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and the first operation part and the third operation part are operated. If the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the state in which the probability setting value is changed, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability set value to a possible state. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change state, and it is possible to increase the work efficiency in the game arcade. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, the state does not shift to the probability set value changing state, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  In FIG. 45, the state of the setting key switch is performed prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch, so that the state shifts to the probability set value changing state even when the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are simultaneously operated. However, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear switch is on may be used as the condition for shifting to the probability set value change state. By using a plurality of operation units as conditions, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value change state.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment which does not include the RAM clear button, the state in which the main body frame is in the open state is detected by the open / close detection means, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the closed state, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation section and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability setting value. It can be said that. Also in this case, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the setting value changing switch is on may be used as the condition for shifting to the probability setting value changing state.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation unit. The setting means can determine the selected probability set value by operating the third operation unit.

  In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be interchanged. That is, if there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the process from step S407 is performed to change the selected probability set value, and if there is an input from the set value change switch, the process from step S412 is performed. Alternatively, a process of determining the selected probability set value may be performed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification is different in the operation of determining the probability set value.

[Probability set value change processing]
In this modification, a probability set value change process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability set value change process, when the set value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the process from step S407 is performed to change the selected probability set value. When the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the process from step S412 is performed, and the process for fixing the selected probability set value is performed.

  Here, the first input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined period of time, and the first input mode is present when the pressing is completed. To judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the hand is released from the set value change button due to a short press operation (when the set value change switch 151 is turned off). The reason why the hand is released from the set value change button is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

  Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time or more, and the second input mode is provided when the predetermined time has elapsed. To judge. That is, the probability setting value is determined when there is a long-time pressing operation exceeding the specified time (when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

  As described above, the probability set value can be selected and confirmed by the set value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the set value change button is pressed. The operation of changing and confirming the set value and the operation of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum number of operation units, so that the operation efficiency at the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. Note that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-described operations, and any operation may be used as long as the operation can be determined.

  From the above, the setting unit (game control device 100) is configured to operate a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM 111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability set value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. It will be.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a description will be given of a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, a probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In the probability setting value confirmation process, when a game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation processing is terminated and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode.

  The predetermined abnormality can be arbitrarily set, but in this case, it is illegal for the magnet, illegal for the electric wave of the panel, illegal for the electric wave of the frame, illegal for the ordinary telephone, and illegal for the special winning opening. If any of these abnormalities are occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by wrongdoing.If such abnormalities occur, do not shift to the probability setting check mode, so that the person who commits the wrongdoing will know the probability set value. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the switch abnormality due to the disconnection of the connector or the like, a shot ball out error, an overflow error, a dispensing abnormality error, and a glass frame opening error are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified to the game store side. It is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known before the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality is received and the attendant checks it.

  This security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started, so as to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the gaming machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal exceeding a predetermined time.

  In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode.However, the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated while being kept in the ON state, the mode shifts to the probability set value check mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically checked when all the predetermined abnormalities are eliminated, so that the efficiency of the checking operation can be improved.

  Further, by applying the configuration of the above-described sixth modification, the mode is switched to the probability set value check mode only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You may do it. In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared.

  As described above, when the setting key switch is kept in the ON state from the state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode is not shifted to the probability set value check mode, so that the mode cannot be shifted to the probability set value check mode. If the setting key switch is inadvertently turned on in a state where a predetermined abnormality that is a state has occurred, then the state becomes a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved (a state not a prohibition state), and the probability setting value is set. It is possible to prevent the display of the probability set value from being shifted to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when operated with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

  From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special result is obtained as a result of the game, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control and a probability set value to which a probability value to be used for a game lottery are assigned to an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)). It is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is set to a predetermined state. Even in the state so that the was to avoid a confirmation state. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode in accordance with the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by indicating the probability set value.

  Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine. This means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the information is eliminated. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and to notify the outside that the probability set value cannot be confirmed, and the probability set value is indicated. This can prevent inconvenience.

  Further, a storage unit (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game is provided, and the control unit stores the specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage unit is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. This means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

  In addition, the setting unit sets the operation unit to the predetermined state in a state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred, and when all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved while being in the predetermined state, all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved. Thus, the confirmation state is set based on this. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically checked when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the checking operation can be improved.

  In addition, the setting means sets the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in a state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally indicated.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, a probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation processing, when the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S511). If the game is not being played (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

  On the other hand, when the game is being played (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the routine goes to a step S435. As a result, the mode can be shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is suspended during the probability set value confirmation mode.

  After performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game has not been interrupted, the probability set value confirmation processing ends. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game is set to restart (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability set value is set. The confirmation processing ends. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode is restarted.

  In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game or the ordinary figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. Further, a display indicating that the apparatus is in a suspended state may be displayed on the collective display device 50.

  In addition, when the game is interrupted, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is restarted, a restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable role. The display on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

  Even during the interruption of the game, winning in the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 38 may be made valid or invalid. The payout of the game balls may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[Eleventh Modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is configured to output a sound accompanying a change in the probability set value.

  FIG. 50A shows an example of a case where the probability set value is changed. When the power of the gaming machine is off, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the setting is performed. The value is changed (t12). Based on the change to the set value state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of changing the probability setting to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is changed based on the reception of this command. To output a change notification sound. As the notification sound during change, any sound may be used, and for example, a sound saying “probability setting value is being changed”, a specific music or a warning sound may be mentioned. Also, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 inform the fact that the probability set value is being changed. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display “Probability setting value is being changed”. That is, the effect setting device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value has been changed. By performing notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability set value has been changed, and even if the probability set value is incorrectly changed during business hours, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding area It is possible for the player to notice and prevent an unauthorized game from being played.

  Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn the setting key switch into the off state, the probability set value change state ends (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, a command of the probability setting change end is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs setting for a predetermined period (for example, three minutes) based on the reception of this command. A probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information on the set probability setting value is output (t13 to t14). After that, a sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

  Although any sound may be used as the probability set value notification sound, a sound corresponding to the set probability set value is output, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, when the probability set value is 1, a voice saying “probability set value 1 has been set” is output. Of course, other sounds may be used, or specific music or alarm sounds may be used. The display according to the probability set value similarly set is also performed on the display device 41. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a display “probability setting value 1 has been set” is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

  In addition, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified of the probability set value as being in accordance with the set probability set value. You may do it. In other words, the probability setting value is notified using the effect device used in the game. By performing notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability set value has been changed, and even if the probability set value is incorrectly changed during business hours, the salesclerk of the game store or the surrounding game The player can be aware of this, and it can be prevented that an illegal game is played.

  In addition, when the state is the probability set value change state, external information indicating that the state is the probability set value change state is output, so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the state is the probability set value changed state. Is also good. Similarly, when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode, external information indicating that the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode is output, and it is confirmed that the external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability set value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. In this way, the game shop can immediately recognize the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. In addition, the probability set value notification sound may be output over a period during which the game cannot be advanced. In this way, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business hours, the game cannot be played immediately, and the illegal progress of the game can be prevented. Further, when the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode, the speaker 19a, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the panel decoration device 46, the board production device The notification may be made by an effect device such as 44.

  Further, each time the probability set value is updated by an operation in the probability set value change state, a sound corresponding to the updated probability set value may be output. Further, other effect devices may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player, Control means (game control device 100) for performing control; and setting means (game control) for enabling selection of a probability set value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating an operation unit. Device 100) and effect devices (speakers 19a and 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, and board effect device 44) for performing a game effect. The set probability value can be notified by the effect device. Therefore, fraudulent acts can be prevented. Further, the effect that the probability set value can be changed can be notified by the effect device. In addition, it can be notified by the effect device that the probability set value can be confirmed.

  Further, after the probability set value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business hours, the game cannot be played immediately, and the game can be prevented from being illegally advanced.

<Suggested production>
The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a pseudo consecutive effect for temporarily stopping and re-changing the decoration special symbol (identification information), and a suggestion effect for suggesting execution of the pseudo consecutive effect. The suggestion effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility that the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. Even if the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed, the suggestion effect may be executed. That is, after the suggested effect is executed, the pseudo consecutive effect may be executed, or the pseudo consecutive effect may not be executed.

FIG. 51 shows an example of the suggestion effect of the present embodiment.
When the special figure change display game starts, the effect control device 300 executes the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game on the display device 41.
During execution of the decoration special figure change display game, the display device 41 includes, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), for example, a decoration special figure change display game display section 41a that displays the decoration special figure change display game, A first stand-by hold display section 41b1 that displays a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory, and a second standby hold display that displays a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the unstarted second start memory. The display unit 41b2, the on-hold display unit 41c for displaying information about the start memory during digestion (the start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure change display game), and the decorative special figure change display game display unit 41a A small symbol variable display section 41d for variably displaying a small symbol that is relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification information) that is variably displayed, and a number holding display section 41e for displaying the number of unstarted start memories by numbers. Is provided .

The effect control device 300, for example, at the start of the decorative special figure variation display game, determines whether or not to execute a pseudo continuous effect in the decorative special figure variation display game from the game control device 100. And the like, and a suggestion effect lottery that determines whether or not to execute a suggestion effect in the decorative special figure variation display game based on an effect control command signal (effect command) from the game control device 100 or the like. And do.
Then, when the suggestion effect lottery is won, the effect control device 300 performs the suggestion effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, for example, as illustrated in FIG. An execution suggestion image G1 that is an image indicating that there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous production is likely to be performed, and an expectation degree suggestion image G2 that is an image that indicates the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the pseudo continuous production is performed. Is displayed.
In addition, when the pseudo consecutive production lottery is won, the production control device 300 starts the pseudo consecutive production at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c). Then, the pseudo consecutive symbol G3 for notifying the start of the re-variation is stopped and displayed.

Since the pseudo-sequence symbol G3 is stopped and displayed at the start of the pseudo-sequence production, the execution suggestion image G1 can be said to be an image indicating that the pseudo-sequence symbol G3 may be stopped and displayed. Similarly, it can be said that the expected degree suggestion image G2 is an image indicating the expected degree at which the pseudo consecutive symbol G3 is stopped and displayed.
In the decorative special figure variable display game shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54 described later, the left, middle, and The variable display is stopped in the right order and the result mode is displayed. However, the stop display order of the decorative special symbol in the decorative special figure variable display game is not limited to the order of left, middle, and right, and can be changed as appropriate. Yes, for example, the order may be left, right, and middle.

Here, in the present embodiment, the only difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo consecutive symbol G3 is the level of the transparency. Specifically, the execution suggestion image G1 is an image obtained by making the opaque pseudo-continuous pattern G3 translucent. In other words, the image displayed on the back side of the execution suggestion image G1 is visible (or easily visible) through the execution suggestion image G1, but is displayed on the back side of the pseudo continuous symbol G3. Is not visible through the pseudo consecutive symbol G3.
Note that the difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo-continuous pattern G3 is not limited to the level of transparency, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a state in which the predetermined image is temporarily stopped may be referred to as an execution suggestion image G1, and a state in which the predetermined image is stopped may be referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol G3.

For example, the expected degree suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1 as shown in FIG. There is a case where it is displayed over the suggestion image G1. That is, the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 includes a display mode displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1 and a display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. The degree can be suggested.
It should be noted that among the display modes of the expected degree suggestion image G2, the display mode superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, a mode as shown in FIG. G1), or a mode in which a part of the expected degree suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1.

  Further, the display mode that is displayed so as to be superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 may be a mode in which the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed after being superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 behind the execution suggestion image G1. Since the execution suggestion image G1 is a translucent image, both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 are visible even when the expectation suggestion image G2 is arranged behind the execution suggestion image G1. Further, the expected degree suggestion image G2 may be a translucent image. By making both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 translucent images, it is also possible to visually recognize the state of the fast-moving decorative special symbol (variable display mode).

  The expectation degree suggestion image G2 is configured by at least one of a first specific image (a character image “?”) And a second specific image (a character image “!”). That is, in the display mode of the expected degree suggestion image G2, there are a plurality of display modes in which the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expected degree suggested image G2 are different, and different execution expectation degrees are suggested according to the display mode. I can do it.

FIG. 52A shows an example of the execution expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion image G2.
For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 includes a display mode (“?”) Including one first specific image and a display mode including one second specific symbol. Mode (“!”), Display mode (“??”) including two first specific images, display mode (“!!”) including two second specific symbols, and first specific symbol Is a display mode in which a second specific symbol is arranged on the left side (“!?”) And a display mode in which the second specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the first specific symbol is arranged on the left side (“?!”). In addition, the suggested execution expectation differs depending on the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expectation suggestion image G2.

  Further, the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 includes, for example, a display mode displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1 and a display mode displayed superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 as shown in FIG. Even if the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images constituting the expected degree suggesting image G2 are all the same, the expected degree suggesting image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggesting image G1, The suggested execution expectancy differs between the case where the suggested execution image is displayed over the suggested image G1.

Specifically, for example, an expected degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51B, that is, a display mode (“!?”) In which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side, and the execution suggestion is made. In the case of the expected degree suggestion image G2 displayed in a display mode displayed side by side with the image G1, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expected degree suggested image G2 shown in FIG. , The degree of expectation that the pseudo continuous production is executed) is 40%.
For example, an expectation degree suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51D, that is, a display mode (“!?”) In which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side, and an execution suggestion image G1 In the case of the expected degree suggestion image G2 displayed in a superimposed display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expected degree suggested image G2 shown in FIG. It can be suggested that the degree of expectation that the continuous production is executed) is 50%.
Which of the display modes of the expected degree suggestion image G2 is determined, for example, in a suggestion effect lottery.

Here, the first specific image (the character image “?”) And the second specific image (the character image “!”) Are common to these two types of specific images, for example, as shown in FIG. And common parts that are not common.
Note that the types of specific images are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.
In addition, the common portion common to each of the plurality of types of specific images may be a portion having a common color or shading in addition to a portion having a common shape.
In addition, the specific image does not have to be configured with a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images and a non-common part not common. In other words, the specific image does not have to have a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images, but can display the unified expectation suggestion image G2 regardless of the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2. From the viewpoint of the above, it is preferable that the specific image has a common part common to each of the plural types of specific images.

Further, the expected degree suggestion image G2 is not limited to an image constituted only by the specific image, and may include an image other than the specific image as long as the image includes at least the specific image. Specifically, the expected degree suggestion image G2 is, for example, “may be a pseudo-ream?” (Since? Is a specific image, it can be changed to!?! ????????, or !!!!). Is also good.
Further, the specific image is not limited to a character image, and may be a character image, for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 53A, the non-common portion of the left specific image (first specific image) is an image portion imitating both eyes, and the non-common portion of the right specific image (second specific image) is sunglasses. And the other parts are common parts.
In addition, the expectation suggestion image G2 indicates that the result of the running special figure change display game is not the expectation (execution expectation) at which the pseudo continuous production is executed, as shown in FIG. May be suggested. In this case, the suggestion effect can indicate that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed by the execution suggestion image G1, and can also indicate the jackpot expectation degree by the expectation degree suggestion image G2.

Further, the suggested effect is not limited to the effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
The suggestion effect may be an effect indicating stop display of a predetermined general symbol, as shown in FIG. 54, for example. Here, the decoration special design includes a general design (designs 1 to 9) and a special design (pseudo continuous design G3 and the like).

  Specifically, first, the decorative special figure variation display game starts, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 54A, the variation display in the left variation display area stops, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, the suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and an execution suggestion image G1 indicating that there is a possibility that a stop display of a predetermined general symbol (here, “5”) may be executed in the middle fluctuation display area. And an expectation suggestion image G2 indicating the expectation (execution expectation) at which the stop display of the predetermined general symbol is executed in the middle fluctuation display area. Thereafter, the fluctuation display in the medium fluctuation display area is stopped, and a predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 54C, or a non-predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, since the reach state occurs in FIG. 54 (c), it can be said that the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54 (b) is an effect indicating the execution of the reach effect. That is, in the execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIG. 54 (b), an image suggesting that the reach effect may be executed, that is, the same decoration special symbol as the already stopped decoration special symbol is stopped and displayed. It can be said that the image suggests that there is a possibility of The expected degree suggestion image G2 illustrated in FIG. 54B is an image indicating the expected degree of execution of the reach effect (execution expected degree), that is, the same decorative special design as the decorative special design already stopped and displayed. It can also be said that the image indicates the degree of expectation to be stopped and displayed.

  Note that, in the suggestion effect that suggests the stop display of the predetermined general symbol, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 does not indicate the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) at which the stop display of the predetermined general symbol is executed. The result of the running special figure change display game may indicate the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that results in a big hit.

  The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54 (b) targets the middle fluctuation display area among the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas constituting the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 41a, that is, the middle fluctuation display area. The execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the variable display area are displayed, and the execution suggestion image G1 indicates that a predetermined general symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle variable display area. Although the expected degree suggesting image G2 indicates the expected degree at which the predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the suggestion effect suggesting the stop display of the predetermined general symbol may be directed to the left variable display area of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right, or may be the right variable display area. May be targeted.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), a suggestion effect indicating stop display of a predetermined general symbol is provided for each of two variable display regions among the three variable display regions of left, middle, and right. You may go. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), a suggestion effect indicating stop display of a predetermined general symbol may be performed for each of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right.
As shown in FIG. 54 (d) and FIG. 54 (e), by performing a suggestion effect indicating stop display of a predetermined general symbol for each of the plurality of variable display regions, simultaneously performing a plurality of suggestion effects. Can be. Furthermore, since the results of a plurality of suggestive effects (whether or not the information suggested in the suggestive effects was correct) are not known at once, but are sequentially understood for each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation stops, the expectation of the player is reduced. While continuing for a long period of time, the expectation of the player can be gradually increased.

The suggestion effect is, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, the execution of a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display (hereinafter referred to as “hold display”) from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be a production that suggests.
Specifically, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the decoration special figure variation display game starts, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b) or FIG. An execution suggestion image G1 indicating that there is a possibility that a pending change effect may be executed when a suggestion effect is performed, and an expectation degree suggestion image indicating an expectation (execution expectation) at which the hold change effect is executed. G2 is displayed. Thereafter, the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 are deleted at a predetermined timing without performing the hold change effect, or a hold change effect is performed at a predetermined timing, for example, as shown in FIG. Thus, the hold display (here, a circle) in the first display mode changes to the hold display (here, a star) in the second display mode. In this case, the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, a semi-transparent image of the suspended display in the second display mode.

In FIG. 55 (c), a part of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 overlaps with the execution suggestion image G1, but the display aspect of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1. May be a mode in which the entirety of the expected degree suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1, or a mode in which a part of the expected degree suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1.
Further, in FIG. 55 (c), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is arranged in front of the execution suggestion image G1. May be a mode in which the expected degree suggestion image G2 is displayed in front of the execution suggestion image G1 so as to be superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1, or the expected degree suggestion image G2 is displayed behind the execution suggestion image G1. A mode in which the image is superimposed on the image G1 may be displayed.
In the suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 54B and 54C, the execution suggestion image G1 and the degree of expectation corresponding to the suspension display (hereinafter referred to as “execution suspension display”) displayed on the suspension display section 41c. The suggestion image G2 is displayed to indicate that the display mode of the pending execution display may be changed by the execution suggestion image G1, and the display mode of the pending execution display is changed by the expectation degree suggestion image G2. However, it is not limited to this. That is, the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “standby hold display”) displayed on the first standby hold display unit 41b and the second standby hold display unit 41b2 are displayed. The execution suggestion image G1 indicates that there is a possibility that the display mode of the standby hold display may change, and the expectation degree that the display mode of the standby hold display changes by the expectation suggestion image G2. It may be suggested.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (a special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when the result of the game is a special result. The gaming machine includes a suggestion effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a suggestion effect (see FIGS. 51 (b) and (d)) indicating the execution of a predetermined notice effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive effect). In the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of “?” Or a character image of “!”) Can be displayed, and a predetermined image is determined according to the order of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in the suggestion effect. (Expected degree of execution) or the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) at which the result of the game is a special result is different (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (b)).

Therefore, the specific image displayed in the suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the predetermined notice effect, the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) at which the predetermined notice effect is executed or the degree of expectation (big hit) at which the result of the game becomes a special result. Expectation), it is possible to enhance the interest in the suggested production.
Note that the suggested effect is not limited to an effect suggesting the execution of a pseudo continuous effect as a predetermined announcement effect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. The effect may suggest an execution of an effect, or may be an effect suggesting the execution of a change-on-hold effect as a predetermined notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and (c), for example. In the case where the suggested effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous production, a pseudo continuous suggestion image suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous production is displayed in the change display area of the suggestion target as the execution suggestion image G1 (FIG. 51). (B), (d)), when the suggested effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect, a reach mode suggestion image indicating the execution of the reach effect and the type of the reach effect as the execution suggestion image G1. May be displayed in the change display area of the suggestion target, or when the suggested effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the pending change effect, as the execution suggestion image G1, the pending change suggestion indicating the execution of the pending change effect The image may be displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target.

  Further, a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 may be displayed in one variable display area. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (a), a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 (here, reach mode suggestion images) are arranged on one circumference, and are moved along the one circumference to a predetermined position. A roulette effect may be performed such that the execution suggestion image G1 stopped at the position is a real execution suggestion image, and the rest is a dummy execution suggestion image. By performing such a roulette effect, it is easy to understand which execution suggestion image G1 is real (in this case, what type of reach effect is likely to be obtained), and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (b), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be configured to execute an effect of performing a predetermined operation. In this case, from the viewpoint of making the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 more clear, the expectation suggestion image G2 operates (partly) based on a part of the expectation suggestion image G2. It is preferable to operate in a state in which is fixed. In the example shown in FIG. 56A (b), the swing operation is performed as the predetermined operation. However, the predetermined operation is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a telescopic operation.
Further, from the viewpoint of making it clear that the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 are different images, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (c), the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is a specific image. It may include a surrounding frame image (area cutoff image, area section image, suggested symbol related enhanced image).

In addition, among the display modes of the expectation degree suggestion image G2, the display aspect displayed by being superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. A display mode that looks like this may be used.
Further, the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be displayed at a position distant from the execution suggestion image G1 instead of near the execution suggestion image G1. In this case, for example, a relevance-enhanced image (effect image) straddling the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 may be displayed so that the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 becomes clear. preferable.

  In addition, the positional relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 can be appropriately selected. However, from the viewpoint of preventing misrecognition and making the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 more clear, etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 56A (e), the positional relationship such that the point below the expectation degree suggestion image G2 and the center line (horizontal center line) of the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position. As shown in (f) and (g), there is a positional relationship such that the point below the expectation degree suggestion image G2 and the upper side or the lower side of the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (h). In addition, a position where the center of the expectation degree suggestion image G2 is arranged on the center line (vertical center line) of the execution suggestion image G1 (or may be a position shifted leftward or rightward from the vertical centerline). It is preferable that the positional relationship be as follows. In the examples shown in FIGS. 56A (e) to 56 (h), the display mode of the expected degree suggestion image G2 is a display mode displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1. Is the same as the above-described display mode when the display mode is displayed in a manner superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1.

  Furthermore, the display mode displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1 corresponds to the left fluctuation display area from the viewpoint of preventing misrecognition and clarifying the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation degree suggestion image G2. The expected degree suggestion image G2 is preferably displayed on the left side of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the left fluctuation display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (f), and the degree of expectation suggestion corresponding to the right fluctuation display area is displayed. The image G2 is preferably displayed on the right side of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the right fluctuation display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (e), and the expectation degree suggestion image G2 corresponding to the middle fluctuation display area is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 56A (g) and 56 (h), for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g) and (h), the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the medium fluctuation display area is located on the upper side (or may be located on the lower side. Because the degree of expectation suggestion image G2 overlap could be misinterpreted as corresponding to hold display, it is preferable to display on next preferred).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the suggestive effect, there are a case where a plurality of types of specific images are displayed and a case where any one of the plurality of types of specific images is displayed, When one type of specific image is displayed in the suggested effect (for example, "?", "!", "??", "!!!!") When the images are displayed in the first order (for example, "!?"), And when the plurality of types of specific images are displayed in the second order (for example, "?!"). 52 (a) and 53 (53), the expectation (execution expectation) at which a predetermined announcement effect is executed or the expectation (big hit expectation) at which a game result becomes a special result can be changed. b)).
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest a more detailed degree of expectation, so that the interest in the suggested effect can be further increased.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the predetermined notice effect is that at least a part of the identification information (decorative special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined period in a single game (a special figure variable display game). This is a pseudo continuous production in which the unit variation display for temporarily stopping the information can be executed a plurality of times. This is an effect that suggests the execution of a continuous production, in which a specific announcement effect is performed in a case where the specific image is displayed side by side with the pseudo continuous suggestion image and a case where the specific image is displayed in a manner superimposed on the pseudo continuous suggestion image. 52 (a) and 53 (b).
With this configuration, the correspondence between the pseudo continuous suggestion image and the specific image is clarified, and a more detailed degree of expectation can be suggested.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image can be configured by a common part common to each of a plurality of types of specific images and a non-common part not common (FIG. 52 (b)). )reference).
With this configuration, a specific image with a sense of unity can be displayed, so that the interesting effect of the suggested effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variable display areas based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition is executed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when the result of the above is a special result, the degree of expectation that predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display area (the degree of expectation that stop display of predetermined identification information is executed) (Execution expectation)), an expectation suggestion effect (see FIG. 51 (b), FIG. 54 (b), (d), (e)) can be executed. , A specific image (for example, a character image “?” Or a character image “!”) Is displayed, and the degree of expectation (the degree of execution expectation) differs depending on at least one of the type, the number, and the order of the specific images (FIG. 52 (a)).

Therefore, as a suggestion effect, an expectation degree suggestion effect indicating the expectation (execution expectation) at which the predetermined identification information (decorative special design) is stopped and displayed in the variable display area can be executed. Can be increased.
In the present embodiment, the execution expectation and the jackpot expectation are made different according to the type, the number and the arrangement order of the specific images. And the big hit expectation should just be different. For example, there is only one type of specific image, and the degree of expectation differs according to the number of specific images (for example, “?”, “??”, and “???”). It is also possible.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the expectation degree suggestion effect (suggestion effect), a specific image (for example, a character image “?” Or “! Is displayed, or the specific image is displayed side by side in the variable display area of the suggestion target (see FIGS. 51B and 51D).
With this configuration, the variable display area of the suggestion target is clarified, so that the interest in the suggestion effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variable display areas based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition is executed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when the result of the above is a special result, a suggestion effect suggesting that predetermined identification information may be stopped and displayed, each of the plurality of variable display areas It can be executed as a target (see FIGS. 54 (b) and (e)), and in the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of “?” And a character image of “!”) Are displayed. The degree of expectation that predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display area in accordance with the arrangement order of a plurality of types of specific images displayed in (Expectation of execution of stop display of predetermined identification information (expected degree of execution)) ) Are different (FIG. 52 ( ) Reference).

Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that the predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in the variable display area for each of the plurality of variable display areas, and Since the specific image displayed in the suggestion effect can indicate the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) at which the stop display is executed, the interest in the suggestion effect can be enhanced.
In addition, by executing the suggestion effect for each of the plurality of variable display regions, a plurality of suggestion effects can be simultaneously performed. Furthermore, since the results of a plurality of suggestive effects (whether or not the information suggested in the suggestive effects was correct) can be sequentially understood, the expectation of the player is maintained for a long time, and the expectation of the player is gradually increased. Can be.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image displayed in the suggested effect is superimposed on the variable display region targeted by the suggested effect among the plurality of variable display regions, or the suggested effect is displayed. Can be displayed side by side in the target variable display area (see FIG. 54 (e)).
With this configuration, it is clear which of the plurality of variable display areas is the target of the suggested effect, so that the interesting effect of the suggested effect can be further enhanced.

<Modification of Suggested Production>
Here, FIG. 56B shows a modification of the suggestion effect that suggests execution of a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (particularly, the hold display during standby) from the first display mode to the second display mode.
Specifically, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (a), the decoration special figure variation display game starts, and as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B (b), a suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing. The display mode of the predetermined standby hold display (standby hold display other than the change target standby hold display) changes from the first display mode (here, circle) to the intermediate display mode (here, double circle), It is suggested that a pending change effect may be performed. Note that an expectation degree suggestion image G2 indicating the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) at which the hold change effect is executed may be displayed side by side or superimposed on the standby hold display in the intermediate display mode.

Next, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 56B (d) and (e), the first character image G41 and the surroundings of the standby display section (the first standby display section 41b1 and the second standby display section 41b2). And the second character image G42 performing the predetermined operation is displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 56B (d) and (e), the second character image G42 performs an operation of rotating counterclockwise around the standby display section as a predetermined operation.
Next, as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B (f), the second character image G42 performs a specific operation of specifying a standby display for change to be changed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 56B (f), the second character image G42 performs an operation of pointing to the standby display of the change target by the notification image G43 for notifying the standby display of the change target as the specific operation. ing.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B (g), an operation is performed in which the first character image G41 acts on the standby display of the change target. In the example illustrated in FIG. 56B (g), the first character image G41 performs an action of throwing an action image G44 simulating the hold display of the second display mode toward the standby hold display of the change target as the action action. ing.
Then, as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B (h), the display mode of the standby hold display of the change target changes from the first display mode (here, a circle) to the second display mode (here, a star).

In the example shown in FIG. 56B, the action image G44 thrown by the first character image G41 is the standby display after the change as it is, but is not limited thereto. May be displayed, or an image different from the action image G44 or the first character image G41 may be displayed as a changed standby display.
In addition, when there are a plurality of standby-hold displays of change targets, one second character image G42 may perform the specific operation for each standby-hold display of the change target, or each of the plurality of second character images G42. A specific operation may be performed on the standby display of the change target corresponding to.

In addition, the operation range of the predetermined operation of the second character image G42 can be extended not only to the on-hold holding display section but also to the on-hold holding display section 41c. That is, as the predetermined operation, for example, the second character image G42 may be displayed around the standby display section (the first standby display section 41b1, the second standby display section 41b2) and the active display section 41c. It is also possible to perform the operation of turning clockwise. Thereby, it can be shown that there is a possibility that the display mode of the pending execution display may change.
In addition, when an operation of turning in the counterclockwise direction is performed as the predetermined operation of the second character image G42, the hold display in the first display mode is, for example, an image of turning in the clockwise direction as shown in FIG. 56B (i). (Here, an image imitating a clock hand) may be used. Thereby, the predetermined operation (the operation of turning in the counterclockwise direction) of the second character image G42 can be conspicuous.

<Modification A of the game board>
The game board 30 (including the center case 40 in the present modified example) may be at least partially made of a transparent material.
An example of the game board 30 of Modification A will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58A. FIG. 57 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of the modification A, and FIG. 58 (a) is a left overlapping area in the display unit of the display device 41 attached to the game board 30 of the modification A. It is a figure for explaining 41L and 41R of right side overlap areas.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, an opening 30b is provided substantially at the center of the game board 30, and the display unit (display area) of the display device 41 is visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the opening 30b. It is possible. The length (width) of the opening 30b in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the display unit of the display device 41 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the left end area of the display unit of the display device 41 (the left area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 58A) is a left overlap area 41L that overlaps with the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The right end region (the right region surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 58 (a)) of the portion is a right overlapping region 41R that overlaps with the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.
The game board 30 covers a left overlapping area 41L of the display unit (left and right overlapping with the left overlapping area 41L) and a right covering (covers the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit and overlaps the right overlapping area 41R). The part is made of a transparent material. Accordingly, the left overlapping area 41L of the display unit is visible through the left covering portion of the game board 30, and the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit is visible through the right covering part of the gaming board 30. . Note that the gaming board 30 only needs to have at least the left covering portion and the right covering portion made of a transparent material.

The front surface of the left side cover portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter, referred to as “left-side flow-down region 32L”) is a part of the left-side game region of the game region 32, and allows game balls to flow down. In addition, the front surface of the right covering portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter, referred to as “right downflow region 32R”) is a part of the right game region of the game region 32, and allows game balls to flow down.
Therefore, it can be said that the left overlapping region 41L of the display unit is visible through the left flowing region 32L of the gaming region 32. In addition, it can be said that the right overlapping region 41R of the display unit can be visually recognized through the right flowing region 32R of the gaming region 32.

In the display device 41, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit decreases, the amount of light illuminating the game balls flowing down the front of the display unit (the game balls flowing down the left downflow region 32L and the right downflow region 32R) decreases. Therefore, the game ball flowing down in front of the display section appears dark. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too dark (the brightness of the display color is lower than the lower threshold value), the game ball flowing in front of the display unit is assimilated with the display of the display unit (dark display) and is difficult to see. become.
On the other hand, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit increases, the amount of light illuminating the game balls flowing down the front of the display unit (the game balls flowing down the left downflow region 32L and the right downflow region 32R) increases. The game ball flowing down the front of the club looks bright. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too bright (the brightness of the display color exceeds the upper threshold value), the game ball flowing in front of the display unit is assimilated with the display of the display unit (bright display) and becomes difficult to see. Become.
Therefore, even when the brightness of the display color of the display unit is lower than the lower threshold value or when the brightness of the display color of the display unit is higher than the upper threshold value, it is difficult to confirm the game balls flowing down the front of the display unit, which is interesting. Will decrease.

  Therefore, in the case of the present modification, that is, when using a game board 30 (for example, a game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57) having a configuration in which a game ball can flow in front of the display unit of the display device 41 as a game board, At least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R is displayed with a color whose brightness falls within an allowable range (hereinafter referred to as “sphere visibility securing color”). Specifically, when a game board 30 having a configuration in which a game ball can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is used as the game board, image data for the display device 41 stored in the image ROM 325 is created. At this time, it is created in consideration that the spherical visibility securing color is displayed on at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.

Here, the allowable range of the brightness will be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the brightness of the color of the lowest brightness image (blackout image) among the images that can be displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 is set to “0”, and the display unit of the display device 41 When the brightness of the color of the highest brightness image (whiteout image) among the images that can be displayed is “100”, the brightness of the color of the image displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 takes a value from 0 to 100. . In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the lower threshold of the brightness is set to “20” and the upper threshold is set to “80”, and the allowable range of the brightness is set to a range of 20 to 80. That is, the lightness of the ball visibility securing color falls within the range of 20 or more and 80 or less. Of course, the allowable range of lightness is not limited to the range of 20 or more and 80 or less, and can be appropriately changed.

FIG. 59 shows an example of a display effect performed when the game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is used as the game board. FIG. 59A shows an example of a blackout effect, and FIG. 59B shows an example of a whiteout effect.
In the case of a blackout effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59A, a medium brightness image Q in which the brightness of the display color falls within an allowable range is displayed in each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R. By doing so, it is possible to display the ball visibility securing color on at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.
Also, in the case of a white-out effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, the medium lightness image Q in which the lightness of the display color falls within the allowable range is divided into the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R, respectively. , The ball visibility securing color can be displayed on at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R.

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down the left-side downflow area 32L of the game area 32 has a medium lightness image Q displayed in the left-overlapping area 41L of the display unit (that is, the brightness of the display color of the left-overlapping area 41L is within the allowable range). The game sphere flowing in front of the right-side falling area 32R of the game area 32 is a medium lightness image Q displayed on the right-side overlapping area 41R of the display unit (that is, the right-side overlapping area 41R). Out of the area where the brightness of the display color falls within the allowable range). Then, the game ball can be easily recognized at least when passing in front of the medium brightness image Q (that is, the area where the ball visibility securing color is displayed). (In other words, it is possible to easily confirm the game balls flowing down the left-side downflow area 32L and the right-side downflow area 32R), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, only the background image is shown among the images displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. That is, as shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), by displaying a background image including the medium lightness image Q, at least a part of each of the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R has spherical visibility. The reserved color can be displayed.

Here, in the present invention, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in drawing control of a display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. Scenarios are such that, for example, a display effect such as a change effect of a symbol is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) such as a scenario for a background, a scenario for a left symbol, a scenario for a right symbol,. This is a method of generating a picture of one screen by setting, controlling these individually as scenarios, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
For a plurality of display layers (scenario layers), for example, a category is divided for each display element, such as a background, a left symbol, a right symbol,... This is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching to effect display.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the production of the display device 41 are “background”, “left design”, “right design”, “medium design”, “preliminary 1 character”, “preliminary 2”. The character is divided into eight elements of "character", "hold display (decorative special figure start storage display)", and "small symbol".
Then, a scenario table for a display effect such as a variable effect is created for each of the plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes a “background control scenario table”, a “left symbol control scenario table”, a “right symbol control scenario table”, a “middle symbol control scenario table”, and a “notice 1 character control scenario”. The table is divided into eight elements, namely, a "table", a "notice 2 character control scenario table", a "hold display control scenario table", and a "small symbol control scenario table".
In addition, each display element is constituted by a display layer, and the plurality of display layers are sequentially superimposed from the screen rear side to the screen front side to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layers include “background layer”, “left symbol layer”, “right symbol layer”, “middle symbol layer”, “notice A layer” to “notice F layer”, “holding layer” and There are 12 types of “small symbol layer”.

In the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 32), the effect control device 300 draws predetermined images in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 in the order of the number of motion management regions in the order of the number of motion management regions (step C13). That is, a process of attaching a sprite of a predetermined image to the virtual drawing space is performed.
As shown in FIG. 60, the virtual drawing space is divided into twelve drawing areas from the drawing area for the motion management area 0 to the drawing area for the motion management area 11. Each drawing area is arranged in the order of the number of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer on which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, first, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, the effect control device 300 adds the “background layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn to the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the motion management area 0 drawing area.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the “notification A layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area in the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the “advance notice B layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area in the virtual drawing space.

  Similarly, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the “left symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space. If the data is not NULL, the "right symbol layer" is stored in the rendering area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual rendering space, and if the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "middle symbol layer" is virtual. When the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the "advance notice C layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 7 is not NULL, the "advance notice D Is stored in the rendering area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual rendering space, and if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the “suspended layer” is stored in the rendering area for the motion management area 8 in the virtual rendering space. When the data of the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the “notification E layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space. If the data is not NULL, the “notice F layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL, the “small symbol layer” is virtual. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the drawing space, and the effect display editing processing ends. That.

  Here, when the data of the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so that the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present invention, the “advance notice F layer”) is set in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326. Is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 remains blank. Note that it is possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, to store the display layers while moving them forward), but in this case, one display screen is configured. Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be displayed, every time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, a blank area) is stored. It is necessary to search for the foremost (leading) drawing area in the drawing area, which complicates the processing. On the other hand, according to the present invention, each display layer is stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect contents (that is, the number of display layers forming one display screen). Each time a layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, it is not necessary to search for a drawing area for storing the display layer, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially superimposed from the screen rear side (lower layer side) to the screen front side (upper layer side) in the arrangement order of the drawing areas to form one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, as shown in FIG. 60, for example, the “background layer” stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area located at the top of the twelve drawing areas is the deepest in the screen. The "small symbol layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the twelve drawing areas and located on the side (bottom layer) is located closest to the screen (top layer). Is done.

In such an effect control, when an effect screen (display screen) is generated, a table is divided in advance into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen, and these are individually set. By controlling all the scenarios in the form of a display layer, a picture of one screen is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, for example, the effect control device 300 displays, in the “holding layer”, a standby hold display (decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the standby hold display section 41b) and an active hold display (execute) (A special special figure start memory display displayed on the middle hold display section 41c). Further, in the "small symbol layer", a small symbol (the identification symbol displayed on the small symbol variable display portion 41d) and a number indicating the number of unstarted start memories (a number displayed on the number holding display portion 41e). And draw.

The background image is an image drawn on the “background layer”. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, illustration of images drawn on each layer other than the “background layer” is omitted.
The medium brightness image Q is not limited to the one included in the background image. Specifically, the medium brightness image Q may be, for example, an image (notice image) drawn on any of the “notice A layer” to the “notice F layer”.

The game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow in front of the display section of the display device 41 has a game board 30 as shown in FIG. It is not limited to the game board 30 that is visible through the 32L and that the right overlapping area 41R of the display unit is visible through the right-side downflow area 32R of the gaming area 32.
For example, as shown in FIG. 61A, the game board 30 having a configuration in which a game ball can flow in front of the display unit of the display device 41 has only one of a left end region and a right end region of the display unit of the display device 41. (Here, only the right end area) may be covered. The gaming board 30 only needs to have at least a portion (here, a right-side covering portion) covering the display unit of the display device 41 made of a transparent material. In the case of the gaming board 30, only one of the left end area and the right end area of the display unit of the display device 41 is an overlapping area that overlaps with the gaming board 30 in the front-rear direction. For example, as shown in FIG. The ball visibility securing color is displayed on at least a part of the overlapping area (here, the right overlapping area 41R).

In addition, the game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow in front of the display section of the display device 41 receives game balls flowing down the game area 32 and moves to the stage section 32S, for example, as shown in FIG. Game board 30 to which a warp flow path forming member that forms a warp flow path 32W that guides the game may be attached. The game board 30 only needs to have at least the warp channel forming member made of a transparent material.
The warp flow path 32W is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows game balls to flow down in a line, is a part of the game area 32, and opens toward the left game area of the game area 32, A game ball flowing down the game area can be accepted. The upstream end forms the inflow port of the warp flow path 32W, the downstream end forms the outflow port of the warp flow path 32W, and the warp flow path 32W displays the game ball flowing from the upstream end of the display device 41. After being guided in front of the display unit, the stage unit 32S is guided to the left end. In the case of the gaming board 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a warp overlap area 41 W overlapping with the warp flow path 32 W of the display unit of the display device 41 (an area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 62 (b)) Shows the ball visibility securing color.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 59 (a), (b), 61 (b), and 62 (b), an image imitating lightning is displayed as the medium lightness image Q. The image Q is not limited to an image imitating lightning, and can be appropriately changed.
Further, the brightness of the display color of the medium brightness image Q may not be uniform. Specifically, the medium lightness image Q may be, for example, a gradation image in which the lightness changes stepwise within an allowable range.
The hue and the saturation of the display color of the medium lightness image Q (that is, the color for ensuring the visibility of the sphere) are arbitrary as long as the lightness falls within an allowable range.
The display position, size, shape, and the like of the medium lightness image Q may be fixed or not fixed, but the display device 41 displays a natural image on the display unit of the display device 41. It is preferable that they are not fixed from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom of the image configuration displayed on the display unit.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, different middle lightness images Q are displayed in the left overlapping area 41L and the right overlapping area 41R, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, when the display unit of the display device 41 has a plurality of overlapping areas that overlap the front and rear of the game board 30, by displaying one medium lightness image Q over the plurality of overlapping areas, a plurality of overlapping areas are displayed. The ball visibility securing color may be displayed on at least a part of each of the overlapping areas.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, two middle brightness images Q are displayed in the left overlapping area 41L, but when displaying a plurality of middle brightness images Q in one overlapping area, It is preferable that the interval between the adjacent medium brightness images Q is equal to or less than one game ball. By setting the interval between adjacent medium lightness images Q to be equal to or less than one game ball, game balls moving (rolling or flowing down) from one medium lightness image Q to another medium lightness image Q are not interrupted. You can continue to check.

In addition, the sphere visibility securing color is displayed on at least a part of the overlapping area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only an image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 during a predetermined period is displayed. An image (display screen) in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed at least in part may be used.
Specifically, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 61, when only a part of the right game area of the game area 32 (the right downflow area 32R) overlaps with the display unit of the display device 41 before and after, at least the right An image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the hitting game state (a game state in which right-handing is more advantageous than left-handing) is an image in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. (Display screen).
In addition, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 62, when only a part (warp flow path 32W) of the left game area of the game area 32 overlaps the display section of the display device 41 before and after, at least the left-handed game state An image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the (playing state in which left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing) is an image (display screen) in which the ball visibility securing color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. ).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, in the gaming machine including the gaming board 30 in which the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down and the display means (display device 41) having the display unit, The predetermined game ball flow-down region (left flow region 32L, right flow region 32R, warp flow path 32W) in the game region 32 is located in front of the display unit, and is located in front of and behind the predetermined game ball flow region in the display unit. The overlapping overlapping areas (the left overlapping area 41L, the right overlapping area 41R, and the warp overlapping area 41W) can be visually recognized through the predetermined game ball flowing-down area, and at least a part of the overlapping area has a predetermined brightness. A color (sphere visibility securing color) not less than (lower threshold) is displayed.
Therefore, even if a blackout effect (i.e., an effect of displaying a dark image as a whole on the display device 41) is performed, the game ball flowing in front of the display unit has a predetermined lightness (lower threshold). When passing in front of the area where the above color (ball visibility securing color) is displayed, it is not assimilated with the display on the display unit and becomes easy to see, so that the visibility of the game ball flowing in front of the display unit Can be secured. Further, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from hitting (preventing the game ball from being hit because it is difficult to see the ball).
Note that the brightness of the ball visibility securing color may exceed the upper threshold as long as it is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold (lower threshold).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, in the gaming machine including the gaming board 30 in which the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down and the display means (display device 41) having the display unit, A predetermined game ball flow-down area (left flow area 32L, right flow area 32R, warp flow path 32W) in the area 32 is located in front of the display unit and overlaps with a predetermined game ball flow area in the display unit. The overlap region (the left overlap region 41L, the right overlap region 41R, and the warp overlap region 41W) is visible through the predetermined game ball flow-down region, and at least a part of the overlap region has a predetermined brightness ( A color (sphere visibility securing color) equal to or less than the upper threshold value is displayed.
Therefore, even if a white-out effect (i.e., an effect of displaying a bright image as a whole on the display device 41) is performed, a game ball flowing in front of the display unit has a brightness equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (upper threshold). When passing the area in front of the area where the color (ball visibility securing color) is displayed, it is not assimilated with the display on the display unit and becomes easy to see, so that the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit is improved. Can be secured. Further, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from hitting (preventing the game ball from being hit because it is difficult to see the ball).
The lightness of the ball visibility securing color may be lower than the lower threshold as long as it is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (upper threshold).

The display means is not limited to the display device 41 and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the display means may be, for example, a display device (sub-display device or the like) provided separately from the display device 41, or predetermined information (characters, images, etc.) when light enters from an end face. It may be a light guide plate on which a light emitting pattern composed of fine irregularities is formed by laser processing or the like so as to emerge.
Also, the medium brightness image Q may be an expected degree suggestion image G2 shown in, for example, FIGS. 51A and 51D, that is, a specific image (for example, a character image of “?” Or a character image of “!”). good.

<Modification B of the game board>
A modification B of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 63 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of the modified example B.
In the gaming board 30 of this modification, the point that the out zone unit 800 including the start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, start winning area) is disposed above the out opening 30a is different from the above-described embodiment and the like. It is different from the game board 30 of the above modification.
Also, in the gaming board 30 of this modification, the point that the normal variable winning device 37 is disposed between the normal symbol starting gate 34 and the special variable winning device 38 in the right game area of the gaming area 32 is as follows. It is different from the game board 30 of the above embodiment and the above modified example.

Further, the game board 30 of the present modified example is different from the above-described embodiment and the game board 30 of the modified example in that a main display device 41a and a sub-display device 41b are provided as the display device 41.
The main display device 41a (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment display devices (variable display regions) in which seven light-emitting bodies (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged. Each light-emitting body can independently change the light-emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light-emitting color, etc.), and by controlling the light-emitting mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display. is there. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. In the main display device 41a, a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) are variation displayed in correspondence with the special figure variation display game and then stop-displayed is executed. Further, effects relating to the special figure change display game can be executed by changing the light emission mode.

The sub display device 41b is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (CRT).
On the display screen of the sub-display device 41b, information relating to the game such as a character that produces the special figure change display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect is displayed. Also, the display screen of the sub display device 41b displays a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the unstarted start memory and an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending Display image, etc.) are displayed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the out zone unit 800 and is a diagram (front view) viewed from the front side. FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the out zone unit 800, and is a perspective view as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the out zone unit 800 includes an inflow port 810 and upper and lower effect channels 820 provided above the out zone unit 800 and a middle portion of the out zone unit 800. The middle production channel 830 and the left and right splash members 840 provided, the lower production channel 850 and the outlet (out port) 860 provided below the out zone unit 800, the middle production channel 830 and the lower A pseudo winning port 870 and left and right rotating bodies 880 provided between the effect channel 850 and the effect channel 850 are provided.

Gaming balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning regions provided in the gaming region 32 can flow into the inflow port 810. Therefore, in the present modified example, a game ball that does not win a winning area provided in the game area 32 flows into the out port 30a or the inflow port 810 of the out zone unit 800. It should be noted that the position of the out port 30a can be appropriately changed. For example, the out port 30a may be provided at the upper part of the right game area, or the general winning port 35 (for example, like the right general winning port 35 on the right side). Alternatively, an out port 30a may be provided near the general winning port 35) integrated with the special winning port. That is, even when the winning area is not won, the game ball may flow down to the ball discharging unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 flows out to the upper effect channel 820 on the left or the upper effect channel 820 on the right. Specifically, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 passes through a back channel (not shown) provided on the rear surface side of the out zone unit 800, and becomes a base member of the out zone unit 800. It flows out from the provided outlet (not shown) to the upper effect flow path 820 provided on the front side of the out zone unit 800.

The splash member 840 rotates at a constant speed and guides the game ball flowing down the upper production flow path 820 to the middle production flow path 830 in a first guidance state (in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, by a two-dot chain line). The state shown in FIG. 64) and the second guiding state (the state shown by a solid line in FIGS. 64 and 65) for guiding to the lower effect flow path 850 can be converted.
The game ball guided to the middle production channel 830 by the splash member 840 flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, or falls into the lower production channel 850 before flowing into the pseudo winning opening 870. The game ball that has dropped from the middle effect channel 830 to the lower effect channel 850 flows into the outlet 860.
The game ball guided to the lower production flow path 850 by the splash member 840 flows into the outlet 860, or is guided to the middle production flow path 830 by the rotating body 880 that rotates before flowing into the outlet 860. Is done.

The game ball that has flowed into the outlet 860 or the pseudo winning opening 870 is discharged to the discharge unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured to flow into and out of the outflow port 860 or the pseudo winning port 870. That is, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 810 cannot return to the outside of the out zone unit 800 (the game area 32).

The rotating body 880 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed in a state where the thickness direction substantially matches the left-right direction. The rotating body 880 rotates at a constant speed in a fixed direction (in the case of the present modification, clockwise as viewed from the right side) around a rotating shaft (not shown) passing through the center of the rotating body 880.
The rotating body 880 has a plurality of built-in magnets. This magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880. When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 880, it is attracted to the magnet arrangement location and is lifted from bottom to top by the rotating body 880 rotating from bottom to top, and is lower than the rotating body 880. Is directed from the lower production flow path 850 located to the middle production flow path 830 located above the rotating body 880.

In addition, from the viewpoint of facilitating the attraction of the game ball to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 880, and suppressing the wobble of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 880, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880 A concave portion that is recessed inward may be formed at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement location. Further, instead of the magnet, a ball receiving member such as a plate for lifting game balls may be provided on the rotating body 880. Further, a lifting member that operates like an elevator may be provided instead of the rotating body 880. That is, the out zone unit 800 may be provided with a member for displacing the game ball.
As shown in FIG. 66, at a position outside the splash member 840, an entry prevention wall 890 (or a plurality of nails) for preventing a game ball from entering the out zone unit 800 from the side of the splash member 840. Or a protruding obstacle member made of resin).

The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning port 870 is detected by a pseudo winning port switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
In this modified example, the pseudo winning port 870 is an assist start port, and when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 870, an assist symbol effect is executed. Here, the "assist symbol effect" means that a plurality of assist symbols (identification information) are variably displayed on the sub-display device 41b and then stop-displayed, and the stop-displayed assist symbol (hereinafter referred to as "assist stop symbol") is displayed. This is an effect related to the decoration special figure variation display game on the main display device 41a.

67 to 73 are diagrams for explaining the assist symbol effect of the present modification. The assist symbol effect of the present modification includes an assist symbol change effect and an assist symbol replacement effect, and is executed by the display device 41 (the main display device 41a and the sub-display device 41b).
First, when the special figure change display game (hereinafter, referred to as “simulated winning special figure game”) executed at the time when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 is a special figure change display game accompanied by a reach effect. The executed assist symbol effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.
When the special prize-winning special figure game involves a reach effect, the assist symbol change effect and the assist symbol replacement effect are executed during the pseudo prize-winning special figure game.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, a first symbol (first special symbol), a second symbol (second special symbol), and a third symbol (third special symbol) are displayed on the main display device 41a. If the game ball wins in the pseudo winning opening 870 during the execution of the fluctuation display of ()), the assist symbol fluctuation effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), in each of the two left and right assist symbol variation display areas of the sub-display device 41b, the variation display of the assist symbol composed of a number or the like is started, and is performed for a predetermined time. Later, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the assist symbol variation display is stopped and an assist stop symbol is displayed. 67 to 73, a circle displayed at the upper right of the sub display device 41b is a decoration special figure start storage display (standby hold display) corresponding to the unstarted start memory.

  In this case, the same reach symbol as the reach symbol derived in the pseudo prize winning special figure game is displayed as the assist stop symbol. The reach symbol derived in the pseudo prize winning special figure game is, for example, a stop symbol of the pseudo prize winning special figure game determined at the start of the pseudo prize winning special figure game (step of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 77)). C522). Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol of the pseudo winning prize special game is determined to be "757", "77" is displayed as the assist stop symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (c), for example. You.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), for example, the variable display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) is stopped, and the remaining one (the example) is stopped. When only the third symbol is changed and displayed, the assist symbol replacement effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the stop display of the first to third symbols is displayed. (The first symbol and the second symbol in this example) are replaced with the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 68, “76” is replaced with “77”. Then, when the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect ends, and the reach effect starts.
Thus, in the assist symbol effect of this modification, when the assist stop symbols are aligned in the assist symbol change effect, it is as if the assist stop symbol assisted the reach occurrence in the subsequent assist symbol replacement effect. I can show you.

Next, when the special prize-winning special-figure game is not the special-figure fluctuation display game with a reach effect, the special-figure fluctuation corresponding to the uncompleted special-figure start memory at the time when the game ball flows into the pseudo prize winning port 870. The assist symbol effect executed when the special game change display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS.
If the special prize-winning special figure game does not involve a reach effect, and if a game with a reach effect is included in the undigested special-figure variation display game, the assist symbol is displayed during the pseudo prize-winning special figure game. The variable effect is executed, and the assist symbol replacement effect is executed during a special figure change display game (a special figure change display game with a reach effect) performed after the pseudo winning special figure game. That is, one assist symbol effect is executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), when a game ball wins in the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of the first to third symbols is being executed on the main display device 41a, The assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol fluctuation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the assist symbol fluctuation display is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist stop symbol is displayed as shown in, for example, FIG. 69 (c).
In this case, a non-probable change reach symbol among the reach symbols in which the two symbols are aligned is displayed as the assist stop symbol. Specifically, for example, odd-numbered symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) among identification symbols are probable symbols, and even-numbered symbols (“2”, “2”) among identification symbols. When “4”, “6”, “8”) are non-probable symbols, “22”, “44”, “66”, or “88” is set as the assist stop symbol.

  The reach symbol derived in the special figure variation display game (the special figure variation display game with a reach effect) performed after the pseudo prize winning special figure game is, for example, the reach symbol determined at the start of the special figure variation display game. It can be specified based on the stop symbol of the special figure change display game (see step C522 of the change effect setting process (FIG. 77)). During the pseudo prize winning special figure game, the stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game performed after the pseudo prize winning special figure game is not determined. In a special figure change display game (a special figure change display game with a reach effect) performed after the time special figure game, whether a certainty-reachable reach symbol is derived (reachable with a certainty-variable pattern) or a non-probable-change reach pattern Is derived (it becomes a reach with non-probable changing symbols). Therefore, in this modified example, in order not to reduce the interest of the game, in this case, a non-probable change reach symbol is displayed as the assist stop symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), for example, the special prize-winning special figure game ends, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), a special figure change display game with a reach effect starts. As shown in (c), the fluctuation display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) is stopped, and the remaining one (the third symbol in this example) is stopped. When only the variable state is displayed, the assist symbol replacement effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), an assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a stop display of the first to third symbols is displayed. Are replaced with assist stop symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 71, “76” is replaced by “44”. Then, when the assist stop symbol shifts from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect ends, and the reach effect starts.

Therefore, if the assist stop symbol is different from the reach symbol derived in the special figure variable display game (the special figure variable display game with the reach effect) performed after the pseudo winning special figure game, for example, the figure As shown in FIG. 71 (c), the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced with a reach symbol derived in the special figure variable display game. In the example shown in FIG. 71, “44” is replaced with “77”.
As described above, in the assist symbol effect of the present modified example, the pseudo special prize winning special figure game does not accompany the reach effect, and the game with the reach effect is included in the undigested special figure fluctuation display game. In this case, the assist stop symbols can be made to remain in the aligned state until the special figure variation display game that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game. Thus, the sense of expectation of the occurrence of reach can be continued over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, the special figure change display game corresponding to the uncompleted special figure start memory at the time when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 when the pseudo special winning special figure game is not the special figure change display game accompanied by the reach effect. An assist symbol effect executed when a special figure change display game with a reach effect is not included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.
If the pseudo-winning special-figure game does not involve a reach effect, and if the game with the reach effect is not included in the undigested special-figure variation display game, assist during the pseudo-winning special-figure game Only the symbol fluctuation effect is executed, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, in this case, the assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when a game ball wins in the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of the first to third symbols is being executed on the main display device 41a, The assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the variation display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist stop symbol is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). In this case, a non-reach symbol in which two symbols are not aligned is displayed as the assist stop symbol.
Thereafter, as shown in, for example, FIG. 73A, when the special prize-winning special figure game ends, the assist symbol effect ends, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 73B, the assist stop symbol disappears. Therefore, if the game ball wins again in the pseudo winning opening 870 during the special figure change display game performed after the pseudo special winning special figure game, as shown in FIG. The design effect is started.

  As described above, in the assist symbol variation effect of the present modification, the “reach mode” in which the reach symbol in which two symbols are aligned as the assist stop symbol is displayed, and the non-reach symbol in which the two symbols are not aligned as the assist stop symbol. Are displayed, and there are two production modes of “reach-free mode”. Then, it is possible to notify (suggest) whether or not a reach effect has occurred, depending on the effect mode of the assist symbol change effect.

[Main processing]
In order to execute the assist symbol effect, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes a main process shown in FIG. 74 instead of the main process shown in FIG.
In the main process of this modification, an assist symbol control process (step C31) is executed between the hall / player setting mode process (step C10) and the random number update process (step C11).

[Assist symbol control processing]
FIG. 75 shows an assist symbol control process (step C31) in the above-described main process. In the assist symbol control process, first, it is determined whether the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (step C401).
If it is determined in step C401 that the pseudo winning opening switch has not detected a game ball (step C401; N), that is, if no game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol control process ends. I do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C401 that the pseudo winning port switch has detected a game ball (step C401; Y), that is, if a game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning port 870, the replacement effect standby flag is set. Is determined (step C402).

In step C402, when it is determined that the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C402; Y), that is, in a state where the assist stop symbols are aligned, a special figure variation display game performed after the pseudo prize winning special figure game If it remains, the assist symbol control process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C402 that the replacement effect standby flag has not been set (step C402; N), it is determined whether the state of the P machine is in a special figure fluctuation (step C403).
If it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is not fluctuating (step C403; N), the assist symbol control process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is changing (step C403; Y), it is determined whether or not the assist symbol variation effect among the assist symbol effects can be executed (step C404). Specifically, for example, when the first half fluctuation in the pseudo winning prize special game is in progress and the remaining time of the first half fluctuation is equal to or greater than a predetermined first threshold, the assist symbol fluctuation effect can be executed. It is determined that there is. Here, the predetermined first threshold value can be set as appropriate, but in the present modification, [1] the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect can be secured (in the present variation, the assist symbol variation effect is performed at the time of the pseudo winning. (Starts during the first half change in the special figure game and ends during the first half change), [2] Secures processing time for replacing part of the special figure game effect at the time of the pseudo prize with the assist symbol effect A value that satisfies both of the two conditions of being able to be set is set.
The information of the first half change is included in the MODE, and the effect control device 300 can set the content of the first half change, the time of the first half change, and the like based on the MODE.
Further, information on the latter half variation such as the presence or absence of the reach and the type of the reach is included in the ACT, and the effect control device 300 can set the details of the latter half variation based on the ACT.

If it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect cannot be executed (step C404; N), the assist symbol control process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol fluctuation effect can be executed (step C404; Y), the fluctuation during digestion (a special figure fluctuation display game being executed, in this case, a special prize winning special figure game). Is a special figure change display game with a reach effect (step C405).

When it is determined in step C405 that the variation during digestion is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a reach effect (step C405; Y), the contents of the assist symbol variation effect (reachable mode) are determined (step C406). . As a result, the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect, the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined.
Next, display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed based on the content determined in step C406 (step C407). Thus, the assist symbol variation display is started, and the assist symbol variation effect (see FIGS. 67 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the assist symbol replacement effect are determined with reference to the contents of the assist symbol change effect determined in step C406 and the contents of the effect in the currently changing display process (step C408). From this, the execution time of the assist symbol replacement effect, the replacement timing of the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined. Here, the content of the effect in the variation during digestion currently displayed and set includes, for example, the content of the variation effect displayed and set in step C523 of the variation effect setting process related to variation during digestion (see FIG. 77), and step C524. , And the contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation effect (decoration special figure fluctuation display game) displayed and set in step C527.

  Next, display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the content determined in step C408 (step C409). As a result, at least a part of the effect of the change during digestion (the special winning game at the time of the pseudo prize) is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect, and the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a during the change during digestion. The assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and an assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 68 (a) to (c)) in which the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol can be executed.

  If it is determined in step C405 that the change during digestion is not a special figure change display game with a reach effect (step C405; N), the non-digestion change (the special figure change corresponding to the undigested special figure start memory). It is determined whether or not a display game, in this case, a special figure change display game performed after the pseudo prize winning special figure game) includes a special figure change display game with a reach effect (step C410). Whether or not the special figure change display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the undigested change can be determined based on the pre-read result from the game control device 100, for example. Here, the pre-reading result is a determination result of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory, and is determined before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

  In step C410, when it is determined that the special figure change display game with the reach effect is not included in the undigested change (step C410; N), the contents of the assist symbol change effect (no reach mode) are determined. Then, based on the determined contents, display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C412). Thus, the assist symbol variation display is started, and the assist symbol variation effect (see FIGS. 72 (b) and (c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed, and the execution of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed. The assist symbol effect is terminated without any of them (see FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b)).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C410 that the special figure fluctuation display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the undigested change (step C410; Y), the effect mode of the assist symbol change effect is set to the reach mode. A lottery process with a reach in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the determination (step C413) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won (step C414).
If it is determined in step C414 that no winning has been achieved (step C414; N), that is, if it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is the no-reach mode, the process proceeds to step C411. As described above, in the present modification, even when the special figure change display game with the reach effect is included in the undigested change, if the winning-type lottery is not won, the pseudo winning Only the assist symbol variation effect is executed during the time special figure game, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, when the assist symbol variation effect of the mode with reach is executed, the assist symbol replacement effect is executed thereafter, whereas, when the assist symbol variation effect of the mode without reach is executed, Assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C414 that the winning has been achieved (step C414; Y), that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is to be the reach mode, the assist symbol variation effect (the mode with reach) is determined. The content is determined (step C415), and the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed based on the determined content (step C416). As a result, the assist symbol variation display is started, and the assist symbol variation effect in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time (see FIGS. 69 (b) and (c)) can be executed.
Next, a replacement effect standby flag is set (step C417), and the assist symbol control process ends. Thereby, in the special figure change display game (the special figure change display game accompanied by the reach effect) performed after the pseudo winning time special figure game, the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. The assist is enlarged and displayed, and the non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol, and the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced if necessary (replaced with the actual reach symbol). A symbol replacement effect (see FIG. 70 (c) and FIGS. 71 (a) to (c)) can be executed.

[Variable command processing]
The received command check processing in the main processing (see FIG. 74) of the present modified example is the same as the received command check processing (see FIG. 33) in the above embodiment. Further, the received command analysis processing in the received command check processing of the present modified example is the same as the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34) of the above embodiment.

FIG. 76 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C501). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in the above-described symbol-type command processing.
If the special figure type is undetermined (step C501; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not determined (step C501; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C502), and the variable command and the symbol type are checked. It is determined whether there is any mismatch (step C503).

  When the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C503; Y), the fluctuation command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C503; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C504). The symbol type means the category of the symbol, and the symbol type includes, for example, a missing symbol, a 16R probability variable A big hit symbol, a 16R probability variable B big hit symbol, a 16R normal A big hit symbol, a 16R normal B big hit symbol, and an 8R certain variable big hit symbol. is there. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is such that an effect is produced as when a symbol command of a 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received even though a variation command (variation pattern command) of a loss is received. This means that the combination conflicts with the above (combination of the fluctuation command and the symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C504), the variation pattern type that is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure is determined according to the received command. Then, a fluctuation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the fluctuation command is performed (step C505).

  Next, special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C506). Here, the special figure is being changed means that the special figure is being changed (during a demonstration waiting for a customer, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Further, if the number of prefetching effects (the number of prefetching executions) is not zero, the number of prefetching effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of prefetching effects by 1) (step C507), and the variable command processing ends.

(Variation effect setting processing)
FIG. 77 shows the fluctuation effect setting processing (step C505) in the above-described fluctuation command processing. In the fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation without reach (step C511). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (step C511; Y), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode is set (step C512). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without a reach, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and it is not necessary to particularly refer to the symbol type here.
Here, the effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model. Further, in each mode, there are provided a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (main display device 41a) are different.

  Next, with reference to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (step C513). Thereby, in the case of the fluctuation without reach, it becomes possible to change the lottery content (specifically, the appearance rate of each preview production mode) of the preview production that appears during each fluctuation in accordance with the number of reservations. Thereafter, a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change is performed using the first-half notice distribution group table (step C516).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (step C511; N), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C514).
Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the first-half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is obtained (step C515), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice distribution group table. The lottery of the notice appearing in the game is performed (step C516).

  Next, a preliminary announcement effect of the second half change is drawn by lottery. The latter half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation in a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special symbol combination) in which a display area excluding a specific area in a plurality of rows of the special figure has a big hit). The display is stopped and the display is changed only in the specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C517). The second-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second-half notice distribution group table.
Then, the address of the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired with reference to the second-half notice distribution group address table (step C518). A lottery for the appearing notice is performed (step C519).

Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the preliminary lottery performed in step C516 and step C519 is determined (step C520), and the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C521). As a result, an effect and a notice such as a fluctuating time and main reach contents of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game are determined.
Next, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol that constitutes a result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is performed with reference to the determined change pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variable display game (see FIG. 4). Step C522).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set based on the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 (step C523), and the display setting of the notice effect is set based on the content of the effect determined in step C520 (step C524). . Through these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above.
Next, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C525). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decoration special figure start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory accompanying the start of the special figure change display game.

Next, a voice number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b and a decoration number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C526), and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C527).
Next, separately from the decoration special figure change display game (the change display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41 (the main display device 41a)), the change displayed by the fourth symbol on the information display device 48. In order to execute the display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C528).
Next, an effect replacement process (Step C529) is performed, and the variable effect setting process ends.

(Direction replacement processing)
FIG. 78 shows an effect replacement process (step C529) in the above-described variable effect setting process. In this effect replacement process, first, it is determined whether or not the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531).
If it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag has not been set (step C531; N), the effect replacement process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531; Y), that is, when the assist stop symbols are aligned, the special figure change performed after the pseudo winning special figure game If the variation remains until the display game, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reach variation (step C532).
If it is determined in step C532 that there is no fluctuation with reach (step C532; N), the effect replacement process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C532 that there is reach variation (step C532; Y), the assist stop symbol currently displayed on the sub-display device 41b or the latest step C523, C524, or C527 is displayed. The contents of the assist symbol replacement effect are determined with reference to the set effect contents and the like (step C533), and the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the determined content (step C534). As a result, at least a part of the effects set in the latest steps C523, C524, C527, etc. are replaced with assist symbol replacement effects, so that the special figure change display game ( In the special figure variation display game with a reach effect), the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the non-reach symbol on the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol. If necessary, the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced (replaced with the actual reach symbol). The assist symbol replacement effect (see FIG. 70 (c) and FIGS. 71 (a) to (c)) ) Becomes executable.
Next, the replacement effect standby flag is cleared (step C535), and the effect replacement process ends.

In this modification, when the pseudo-winning special-figure game is a special-figure fluctuation display game accompanied by a reach effect, the assist symbol fluctuating effect in the mode with the reach is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, even when the special winning game at the time of the pseudo prize is a special figure variation display game accompanied by a reach effect, the reach-type mode lottery process is performed, and when the reach-type mode lottery is won, the assist symbol variation of the reach mode is achieved. It is also possible to configure so as to execute an effect and execute an assist symbol variation effect in a non-reach mode in a case where the reach lottery is not won.
Also, the special prize winning special figure game is a special figure variance display game with a reach effect, and the special figure variance display game corresponding to the special figure starting memory that has not been digested when the game ball flows into the pseudo prize prize port 870. If the special figure change display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the, the assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the pseudo prize winning special figure game, or after the pseudo prize winning special figure game. The assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during a special figure change display game to be performed (a special figure change display game with a reach effect).

  In this modification, even if a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this modification, [1] the replacement effect standby flag is not set, [2] Only when the state of the P machine is changing the special figure, and [3] all three conditions are satisfied that the assist symbol variation effect can be executed), the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 in a state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the execution of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the flow is suspended and the predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it is also possible to configure to execute an assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow. When the execution of the assist symbol effect is suspended, the number of suspensions (the number of assist suspensions) may be displayed on the sub-display device 41b so as to be distinguishable from the decoration special figure start storage display.

In addition, the assist design effect is not limited to the effect of notifying (suggesting) the presence or absence of the reach effect by the assist stop design, but the effect other than the reach effect (SP reach development effect, round promotion effect, pseudo continuous change) The effect may indicate (indicate) whether or not an effect has occurred by using an assist stop symbol.
In addition, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of notifying the presence / absence of the predetermined effect by the assist stop symbol, and can be appropriately changed. The assist symbol effect may be, for example, an effect in which the assist stop symbol is reflected in a predetermined announcement effect executed in a region other than the assist symbol change display area of the sub display device 41b.

In this modification, the assist symbol effect is executed when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, but the effect performed when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 is limited to the assist symbol effect. However, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, an effect of operating a predetermined movable body (for example, a splash member 840 and / or a rotating body 880) can be executed.
In addition, a state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this modification, [1] the replacement effect standby flag is not set, [2] the P machine state is changing the special figure, [3] the assist symbol changing effect Can be executed), when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, an assist symbol effect corresponding to the flow is executed, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied. When a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 in the state, an effect other than the assist symbol effect (for example, an effect of operating a predetermined movable body) is executed instead of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow. It is also possible to configure.

  Further, it is also possible to configure so that the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted into a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored is provided at an appropriate location in the out zone unit 800. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ball storage device may be changed from the first state to the second state, and the game balls stored in the ball storage device may flow into the pseudo winning opening 870. It is possible.

  In this modification, the assist stop symbol is shifted from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a (see FIG. 68 (c), FIG. 71 (b), (c)) or before the start of the assist symbol effect. After the end (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 73 (b)), the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b is blank (blank), but is not limited to this. In the assist symbol change display area after the assist stop symbol is shifted to the main display device 41a or when the assist symbol effect is not executed, for example, a display mode in which the latest assist stop symbol is different from a normal display mode (for example, , A lighter color than usual), a default assist symbol (for example, “00” or “−−”, or an assist symbol when the power is turned on) may be displayed. Character images such as "", "pig" and "cow" may be displayed.

Further, when a model designation command is received, a display (design, image, etc.) corresponding to the model designation command may be displayed in the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. The display corresponding to the model designation command may be performed on the main display device 41a. However, since the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41a, the display corresponding to the model designation command is displayed on the sub display device 41b. Preferably, it is displayed.
In addition, when the assist stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination (for example, “tiger tiger”, “pig cow”, “7 tigers”, “11”, “renren”, “storage”, etc.), the notification of the degree of expectation is given. Alternatively, execution / suggestion of a pending change notice, execution / suggestion of a pseudo-continuous-fluctuation effect, a mini-game (notifying the occurrence of a reach, a pending change, or a pseudo-continuous occurrence based on the result of the mini-game) may be executed. That is, the assist stop symbol may not be made to directly act on the decorative special figure change display game of the main display device 41a, but may be made to act indirectly through an effect related to the special figure change display game. In addition, the variable display of the assist symbol may be related to the general-purpose game, or may be the general-purpose game itself.

Further, in the present modification, the variation display of the assist symbol is stopped (the assist stop symbol is displayed) during the variation display of the first to third symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, after the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a (when two variable displays of the first to third symbols are stopped and only the remaining one is variable displayed). It is also possible to configure so as to stop the variable display of the assist symbol (display the assist stop symbol).
Further, in the present modification, the assist stop symbol has a predetermined combination to act on the decorative special figure variable display game, but the reverse may be applied. Specifically, for example, a reach occurs in the decorative special figure variation display game on the main display device 41a, and an effect is performed in which the reach symbol moves to the sub display device 41b and fits in the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. You may. In this case, an effect using all three 7-segment displays of the main display device 41a can be executed. That is, the assist symbol of the sub display device 41b and the decorative symbol of the main display device 41a interact with each other, and a part of the result of the decorative special figure variable display game (for example, the reach symbol) is displayed on the main display device 41a (first display area). ) And the sub-display device 41b (second display area).
Also, the assist symbol effect may be executed not by the sub display device 41b but by, for example, a light emitting device (LED or the like), or may be executed by both the sub display device 41b and the light emitting device (dot LED). .

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the prize areas (general prize port 35, start prize port 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, first special variable prize apparatus 38, second special variable prize apparatus 39) and In a gaming machine having an out area (out zone unit 800) into which a game ball that does not win the winning area can flow, a specific game (a book game) using the gaming ball flowing into the out area in the out area. In the case of the modified example, a specific game mechanism for performing a game (whether or not a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870) and a predetermined effect (in the present modified example) when it is determined that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result. In this case, an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an assist symbol effect) is provided.

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in the out area (out zone unit 800), the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using game balls flowing into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using game balls that may win the prize area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
Note that the specific game is not a game played in the out area, that is, a game using a game ball flowing into the out area. The game performed in the variable prize device 38, the second special variable prize device 39, or the like, that is, a game using a game ball flowing into the prize area may be used. An example in which the specific game is a game played in the winning area, that is, a game using a game ball that has flowed into the winning area, will be described in a modified example C described later.

In the present modification, the entrance (inflow port 810) to the out area (out zone unit 800) is located at the most downstream prize area among the plurality of prize areas (in this modification, the starting prize opening 36). ), And the receiving width of the game ball is larger than the winning area.
With this configuration, it is possible to play a specific game using a game ball having no chance of winning. A game ball that does not win in the winning area has no chance of winning and gives the player an unnecessary image or a lost image, but by performing a specific game using the game ball that has no chance of winning, It becomes possible to make such a bad image difficult to give to the player.

  Further, in this modification, the specific game mechanism includes a pseudo winning opening 870 and a movable member (in the case of this modification, a splash member 840 and a rotating body 880) for guiding a game ball to the pseudo winning opening 870. The movable member (the rotating body 880 in the case of the present modification) includes a magnet for attracting game balls, and can lift the game ball attracted to the magnet by rotating the game ball. The device 300) can be configured to be able to determine that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870.

With this configuration, the game balls can be kept in the out area (out zone unit 800) for a long time, so that the interest in the specific game (game ball effect) can be enhanced.
Further, the specific game is an effect using game balls flowing into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using game balls that may win the prize area. Performing an effect that cannot be performed using a game ball that may win a region, for example, performing an effect of lifting a game ball against gravity by a movable member (rotary body 880) as in this modification. Becomes possible.
The movable member is not limited to the flap member 840 or the rotating body 880, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can convert between a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored, and other V movable members provided in two types of pachinko machines. A movable member (a movable member capable of guiding a game ball to a specific area) may be used.

  In this modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in the first display area (main display device 41a in the case of the present modification) based on the establishment of the starting condition. And a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) that can be executed, and as a predetermined effect, a plurality of variable display games are displayed in a second display area different from the first display area (the sub display device 41b in the case of the present modification). It is possible to configure so as to be able to execute an effect (assisting symbol effect) in which identification information is variably displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display game has been executed by the game balls flowing into the out area (out zone unit 800). You can give the image that you are doing, and the playability is improved.
In the case of the present modification, the first display area is provided in the main display device 41a, and the second display area is provided in the sub display device 41b. Although provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first display area and the second display area may be provided on the same display device.

In the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is stopped and displayed in the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) in a state where some pieces of identification information are aligned. When the reach state in which the remaining identification information is variably displayed occurs, a predetermined effect (in the case of the present modification, in the sub-display device 41b in the second display area) before the occurrence of the reach state. As a result of assist symbol production), stop display is performed in a state in which the identification information is aligned (see FIG. 68 (a) and the like), and some identification information in the first display area (identification stopped and displayed in an unaligned state). (Information) is replaced with identification information (assisted stop symbol) stopped and displayed in a state aligned with the second display area, whereby a reach state can be generated (FIG. 68 (c), etc.). reference).
With this configuration, the identification information (the assist stop symbol) stopped and displayed in the second display area (the sub display device 41b in the case of the present modification) can make it appear as if assisting the occurrence of the reach. Yes, the interest of the game is improved.

In the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the second display area in the variable display game executed before the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the reach state occurs. When the stop display is performed in the state where the identification information is arranged on the sub display device 41b in the case of the present modification, the second display area is arranged with the identification information until the variable display game in which the reach state occurs. It is possible to configure so as to keep the stop display (see FIGS. 69 to 71).
With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation of the occurrence of reach over a plurality of variable display games, and thus it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) enlarges and displays the identification information stopped and displayed in the second display area (in the case of the present modification, the sub-display device 41b). Later, by replacing the identification information stopped and displayed in a state where the identification information is not aligned with the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a), the identification information enlarged and displayed in the second display area is used. It is possible to configure so as to generate the reach state (see FIGS. 68 (b) and (c)).
With this configuration, the identification information (assist stop symbol) stopped and displayed in the second display area is enlarged, and a part of the identification information (non-reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the first display area. ) Can be skipped (pushed back) to make it appear as if a reach state has been generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) stops and displays the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) in a state in which some identification information is not prepared. In the second display area (the sub display device 41b in the case of the present modification), the display can be stopped and displayed with the identification information aligned (see FIG. 79).
With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a resurrection effect for the loser, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that the gaming machine 10 of the present modification executes a game (a special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the start condition, and is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a display device (sub-display device 41b) capable of displaying a predetermined moving image, and an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of controlling an effect related to a game, The effect control means executes a first effect (for example, an assist symbol effect) on the display device based on a predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, a game ball flowing into the pseudo winning opening 870 of the out zone unit 800), The second effect is executed in response to the result of the first effect being a specific result (for example, the assist stop symbol being a predetermined combination), and the result of the first effect being a specific result. Number of times the third effect if it becomes more than a predetermined number of times (e.g., SP reach demonstration) may be configured so that it can perform the.
With such a configuration, an effective effect can be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, for example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 in the out area (out zone unit 800), an assist symbol effect is executed, and the assist stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination. The accumulated image corresponding to the number of times (specific result times) is displayed on the sub-display device 41b, and the number of times that the assist stop symbol has a predetermined combination (specific result times) becomes a predetermined number or more (for example, n5 times or more). In such a case, the SP reach effect or the like may be executed, and the accumulated image may be deleted when the SP reach effect or the like is executed.
In the example illustrated in FIG. 80, a point image indicating a value based on the number of times the assist stop symbol has a predetermined combination (the number of specific results) is displayed as the cumulative image, and the effect mode of the second effect (the cumulative image The display mode is “first mode (mode displaying a point image“ 100 pt ”; see FIG. 80 (b))” → “second mode (mode displaying a point image“ 200 pt ”. FIG. 80 (c) )) → “third mode (displaying a point image“ 300 pt ”; see FIG. 80 (d))” → “fourth mode (displaying a point image“ 400 pt ”. FIG. 80 (e) )))). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80, the cumulative value switching display effect is executed as the second effect.

As described above, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) causes the display device (sub-display device 41b) to display a predetermined image (accumulated image) as the second effect, and determines that the result of the first effect is the specific result. It is possible to execute an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image in accordance with the event (the assist stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination), and execute the third effect (such as the SP reach effect). As a condition, the display mode of the predetermined image may be returned to the normal display mode (for example, a mode in which the point image is not displayed or a mode in which the point image “0pt” is displayed).
Of course, the predetermined image is not limited to the point image and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image is not limited to the effect shown in FIG. 80 (the effect of increasing the point value), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an effect of increasing a meter value may be performed as an effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a predetermined image as a meter image.

  When the assist stop symbol is directly applied to the decoration special figure change display game (decoration symbol), the player may misunderstand or misunderstand, but as shown in FIG. 80, the first effect, the second effect, And, by performing the third effect, the assist stop symbol is indirectly applied (via a medium such as an image or an accessory) to the decorative special figure change display game, so that it is hard to be misunderstood and misunderstood and the interest is improved. I do.

Note that the third effect is not limited to being executed when the number of times the result of the first effect is a specific result is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and can be appropriately changed. For example, it may be an effect according to the effect mode of the second effect.
Specifically, for example, the third effect is a reach effect. Then, when the effect mode (display mode of the accumulated image) of the second effect at the start of the special figure change display game with the reach effect is the first mode, the special effect change display game has the third effect as the third effect. The outreach effect or the normal reach effect is executed. In the case of the second mode, the reach effect of the normal reach or higher is executed as the third effect in the special figure variation display game. In the figure change display game, a reach effect of SP reach or more is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the fourth mode, a reach effect that has a particularly high expectation among SP reach as the third effect in the special figure change display game May be executed.

  Further, for example, the third effect is a hold change effect (effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed), and the display mode (color) of the decoration special figure start storage display is white <blue <yellow <green <purple. It is assumed that the degree of expectation is higher in the order of <red <rainbow, and the normal display mode (normal color) of the decoration special figure start storage display is not a single color but a mixed color or two or more colors. Then, when the effect mode of the second effect at the hold change timing (display mode of the accumulated image) is the first mode, an effect of changing the color of the decoration special figure start storage display to white is executed as the third effect. Then, in the case of the second mode, an effect of changing the color of the decoration special figure start memory display to a color of blue or more is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the third mode, the effect is displayed as the third effect. An effect of changing the color of the special figure start storage display to green or more color is executed, and in the case of the fourth mode, an effect of changing the color of the decorative special figure start storage display to red or more color as the third effect. May be executed.

  Further, for example, the third effect is a pseudo-continuous-fluctuation effect. Then, when the effect mode of the second effect (the display mode of the accumulated image) at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game accompanied by the pseudo effect is the first mode, the pseudo effect number is 1 as the third effect. In the case of the second mode, an effect in which the number of pseudo-runs is 2 is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the third mode, the number of pseudo-runs in the third mode. Is executed three times, and in the case of the fourth mode, an effect in which the number of pseudo-runs is four may be executed as the third effect.

Further, when the number of lit (light-emitting) character light-emitting portions exceeds a predetermined number or when the point value (or the meter value) exceeds a certain value, an alternative effect may be executed. Good.
In addition, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit, when the number of light-emitting (light-emitting) character light-emitting portions exceeds a predetermined number, or when the point value (or the meter value) exceeds a certain value. In the case of, an effect of notifying the number of rounds of a big hit (for example, an effect of displaying the number of rounds of a big hit in the sub display area 41b) may be performed.

<Modification C of the game board>
A modification C of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.
FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram illustrating a main part of the game board 30 of the modification example C, and is a diagram (front view) viewed from the front side. FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram illustrating a main part of the game board 30 of the present modification, and is a perspective view as viewed from the front side.
The game board 30 of the present modification basically has the same configuration as the game board 30 of the modification B, and hereinafter, different portions will be mainly described. The out zone unit 800 according to the modified example B is capable of flowing in a game ball that does not win any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32, whereas the out zone unit 900 according to the present modified example is A game ball having won a prize can flow into the prize area (in the case of the present modification, the starting prize port 36).

As shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 82 (a), the out zone unit 900 forms the starting winning port 36 on the front side of the game board 30 and the pseudo winning port 900a on the rear side of the game board 30. Winning prize opening forming member 910, a rotating body 920 disposed behind the game board 30, and a game ball winning the starting winning prize opening 36 (that is, flowing into the starting winning prize opening 36 and detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36 a). A first guiding flow path member 930 for forming a first guiding flow path 930 a for guiding the game ball to the rotating body 920, and a game ball lifted up from below by the rotating rotating body 920. A second guiding flow path member 940 that forms a second guiding flow path 940a for guiding to the mouth 900a.
In order to easily illustrate the first guide flow path member 930, the rotating body 920, and the second guide flow path member 940, some of the members are not illustrated in FIGS. 81 (a) and 82 (a). are doing. For example, in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 82 (a), illustration of the game board 30 is omitted. In order to easily illustrate the rotating body 920, in FIG. 81A, a portion of the stage section 32S that overlaps with the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front is indicated by a virtual line (two-dot chain line).

  A portion of the game board 30 that overlaps with the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front, and a portion of the stage 32S that rotates when viewed from the front so that the rotating body 920 disposed behind the gaming board 30 is visible from the front. The portion overlapping with the body 920 has light transmittance. That is, at least a portion (specifically, a portion overlapping the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front) of the game board 30 and the stage portion 32S is transparent or translucent.

  In this modification, the stage portion 32S is a game ball on the stage portion 32S, that is, a game ball guided from the game area 32 outside the center case 40 to the stage portion 32S by the warp flow path portion 43. The stage 32S is configured to drop from only the front end side. Specifically, the stage section 32S is inclined downward, for example, forward. Accordingly, the game balls can directly flow into the starting winning opening 36 provided on the front side of the game board 30 from the stage portion 32S, but can enter the pseudo winning opening 900a provided on the rear side of the gaming board 30 by the stage portion. Cannot flow directly from above 32S. That is, the game ball on the stage portion 32S cannot flow into the pseudo winning port 900a without passing through the starting winning port 36, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, and the second guide channel 940a.

FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the winning opening forming member 910 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the winning opening forming member 910 is formed to be long in the front-rear direction, the front end portion forming the starting winning opening 36, and the rear end portion forming the pseudo winning opening 900a. ing. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the winning end forming member 910 has a front end portion (that is, the starting winning opening 36) protruding forward from the front surface of the game board 30 and a rear end portion (that is, the pseudo winning opening 900a) having a game. The game board 30 penetrates back and forth so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the board 30.

That is, in the present modified example, the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a are arranged in front and behind. Therefore, although the game ball guided by the second guiding flow path 940a actually flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, by arranging the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a back and forth, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, it can be seen that the game ball guided by the second guiding flow path 940a wins the starting winning opening 36. Further, since the game ball guided by the second guiding flow path 940a is a game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a are arranged in front and behind, so that the starting winning opening 36 is formed. It is possible to make it appear as if the winning game ball has won the starting winning port 36 again.
The member forming the start winning port 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning port 900a may not be the same member (winning port forming member 910). That is, the member forming the start winning opening 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning opening 900a may be different members.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and (b), an opening 911 through which a game ball can pass is provided on a side surface or a bottom surface (a right side surface in the present modification) of a front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. Have been. The game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 pass through the opening 911, advance from the inside of the starting winning opening 36 to the outside, and flow into the first guide channel 930a.
In the present modified example, only the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 flows into the first guide channel 930a and is guided to the rotating body 920 by the first guide channel 930a. Specifically, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900 from entering the first guide channel 930a, illustration is omitted around the first guide channel member 930. For example, a plurality of obstacle members (for example, protrusion-like or wall-like members made of resin), nails, and the like are provided.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the width of the first guide channel 930a is set to a width in which the game balls flow down in a line from the upstream side (start winning port 36 side) to the downstream side (rotary body 920 side). Have been.
The first guide channel 930a is inclined so as to descend from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, a height difference (in the case of the present modification, an inclination) is provided on the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 such that the upstream side of the first guide flow path 930a is disposed at a position higher than the downstream side. I have. As a result, the game balls can smoothly flow down the first guide channel 930a (that is, the upper surface of the first guide channel member 930), so that the starting winning port 36 and the first guide channel 930a are clogged. Can be prevented.
Note that the height difference provided on the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 may be a step or the like instead of an inclination.
Further, the first guide flow path member 930 may be disposed behind the game board 30. In addition, on the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 (that is, the first guide flow path 930a), a ball-suppression portion (such as irregularities or protrusions) for suppressing the ball-power of the game ball, or a hole of the rotator 920 is provided. A ball guide portion (such as unevenness or protrusion) for guiding to the portion may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the first guiding flow channel 930a is a substantially L-shaped flow channel, and has a curved portion so that a game ball can smoothly flow down. A downstream portion (that is, a portion extending in the front-rear direction) of the first guide channel 930a is provided in a through-hole 30b provided in the game board 30 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The downstream end reaches the rear side of the game board 30. The through-hole 30b provided in the game board 30 is formed in a size that allows a game ball flowing down the first guide channel 930a to pass. The game balls guided by the first guide flow path 930a pass through the through holes 30b, advance from the front side of the game board 30 to the rear side, and rotate the body 920 disposed behind the game board 30. Flows into the hole.
In FIG. 82 (a), only the entrance (front end) of the through-hole 30b is shown, but the exit (rear end) of the through-hole 30b is, for example, substantially the same as the downstream end of the first guide channel 930a. It is located on a plane (the plane is a plane perpendicular to the front-back direction).

FIG. 81 (b) is a view as viewed from the front side of the rotating body 920, and FIG. 81 (c) is a view as viewed from the front side of the rotating body cover 950 attached to the rotating body 920.
As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the rotating body 920 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed in a state where the thickness direction substantially matches the front-back direction. The rotating body 920 is attached to the rear side of the game board 30 by a rotating shaft 921 passing through the center of the rotating body 920, and is fixed at a constant speed around the rotating shaft 921 in a fixed direction (in the case of this modification, the front side). (In a counterclockwise direction as viewed from above).

  The rotating body 920 is provided with a game ball accommodation section 920a capable of accommodating game balls and a game ball ejection section 920b capable of guiding game balls to a ball ejection unit. Specifically, a plurality of (eight in this modification) holes penetrating in the front-back direction are provided in the rotating body 920 so as to be arranged in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 920. The hole is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and among these holes, discharge of the game ball (specifically, the game ball passes from the front to the rear of the hole). A hole having a discharge regulation wall 922 at the rear end side for regulating the game ball constitutes a game ball accommodation section 920a, and a hole having no discharge regulation wall 922 constitutes a game ball discharge section 920b.

In this modification, the number of the game ball discharging units 920b included in the rotating body 920 is one, but the number of the game ball discharging units 920b is not limited to one, and may be plural.
Further, in the present modification, a part of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 is the game ball housing part 920a, but all of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 may be the game ball housing part 920a. good. That is, the rotating body 920 does not have to include the game ball discharging unit 920b.

  A transparent rotating body cover 950 that covers the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attached to the rotating body 920. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), the rotating body cover 950 is at a predetermined first position (the lowest position (ie, the position at 6 o'clock) in the present modification) among the holes of the rotating body 920. The game ball is positioned between the portion facing the hole that has reached and the portion facing the hole that has reached the predetermined second position (in the case of this modification, the uppermost position (ie, the position at 12 o'clock)). It has an opening 951 through which it can pass.

The rotating body cover 950 is fixed so as not to rotate. That is, even if the rotating body 920 rotates, the rotating body cover 950 does not rotate, and one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains the state where it is arranged at the first position. The other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains a state of being disposed at the second position.
When the rotating cover 950 is transparent or translucent, a pattern or the like for distinguishing the game ball discharge unit 920b from the game ball storage unit 920a may be provided on the front surface of the rotating body 920 or the like. Specifically, for example, a triangular pattern provided on the front surface of the rotating body 1930 shown in FIG. 92 is provided near one of the game ball discharge unit 920b and the game ball storage unit 920a. Is also good. In this case, it is easy to determine whether the game ball has flowed into the game ball discharge unit 920b or the game ball storage unit 920a. It is possible to determine whether or not a game ball wins the pseudo winning opening 900a.

The game ball that has flowed down the first guiding flow path 930a passes through one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 (the lower opening 951 in the case of the present modification), and is rotated by the rotating body 920. Flows into the hole that has reached the first position (the lowest position in the case of the present modification) among the holes provided by.
When the hole is the game ball discharge unit 920b, the game ball that has flowed into the hole of the rotating body 920 passes through the hole and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
In addition, when the game ball that has flowed into the hole of the rotating body 920 has the hole serving as the game ball accommodating portion 920a, the rotating body 920 rotates to move the hole to the second position (the present modified example). In this case, when it reaches the uppermost position), it passes through the other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 (the upper opening 951 in the case of the present modified example) and passes through the second guiding flow path 940a. Inflow. In the present modification, only the game balls lifted by the rotating body 920 (that is, the game balls that have flowed into the game ball housing portion 920a) are configured to flow into the second guiding flow path 940a.

  In addition, the rotating body 920 is not limited to the one that holds the game ball by the hole portion (the game ball storage part 920a, the game ball discharge part 920b), and may be, for example, one that holds the game ball by a magnet. Specifically, for example, a magnet is built in the rotating body 920, and the game ball that is in contact with the magnet arrangement place (the place where the magnet is arranged) on the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attracted (contacted) by the magnet to the magnet arrangement place. In such a state, and the game ball adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location may be lifted upward from below by the rotating rotator 920 (that is, guided to the second guide flow path 940a).

FIG. 82 (c) is a perspective view of the second guide flow path member 940 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the second guide flow path member 940 is a rectangular plate-shaped member, and has an upstream-side protrusion 941 projecting rearward at an upstream end (right end in the present modification). And a downstream projection 942 projecting rearward at the downstream end (the left end in the case of this modification). The upstream projection 941 of the second guide flow path member 940 is inserted from the front into a hole 952 (see FIG. 81 (c)) provided in the rotating body cover 950, and the second guide flow path member 940 has The downstream projection 942 is inserted from the front into a hole (not shown) provided in a predetermined member provided behind the second guide flow path member 940. As described above, the second guide flow path member 940 inserts the upstream protrusion 941 and the downstream protrusion 942 into a predetermined hole, thereby providing a predetermined state (ie, an upstream side of the second guide flow path 940a). In this state, the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 can be fixed at a predetermined position (ie, a position where the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 can be guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a). .
In addition, on the upper surface of the second guide flow path member 940 (that is, the second guide flow path 940a), a ball-suppression portion (such as irregularities or protrusions) for suppressing the ball-power of the game ball or the game ball to the pseudo winning opening 900a. Ball guides (such as irregularities and protrusions) may be provided.

The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 first flows through the opening 911 provided at the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910, and flows into the first guide channel 930a.
The game ball that has flowed into the first guide channel 930a flows down the first guide channel 930a, and out of two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 and the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30. Of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 (the lowest position in the case of the present modification). Into the hole.

When the hole reaching the first position is the game ball discharging unit 920b, the game ball flowing into the hole is discharged to the ball discharging unit. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball discharge unit 920b from the front of the game ball discharge unit 920b passes through the game ball discharge unit 920b and is discharged to the ball discharge unit.
On the other hand, when the hole reaching the first position is the game ball housing portion 920a, the game ball flowing into the hole is lifted up from below by the rotating rotator 920. When the hole reaches the second position (in the case of the present modification, the uppermost position), the game balls accommodated in the hole are out of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950. Through the other (in the case of the present modification, the upper opening 951) and flows into the second induction flow path 940a.

The game ball that has flowed into the second guiding flow path 940a flows down the second guiding flow path 940a and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), an opening 912 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the side surface or bottom surface (rear side surface in the present modification) of the rear end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. Is provided. The game balls that have flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a pass through the opening 912, advance from the inside of the pseudo winning opening 900a to the outside, and are discharged to the ball discharging unit. In this modification, only the game balls that have flowed into the second guiding flow path 940a flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. That is, only game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 can flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a.

  As described above, in the present modification, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 flows into the game ball discharge unit 920b of the rotating body 920 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit, or the game ball of the rotating body 920 is played. When the ball flows into the ball container 920a, it flows into the pseudo winning port 900a and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. In other words, the game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 cannot return to the outside of the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).

The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
The pseudo winning opening 900a of this modified example is an assist starting port similarly to the pseudo winning opening 870 of the modified example B. When a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, an assist symbol effect (see FIGS. 67 to 73) is executed. Is done. It is also possible to execute the effect shown in FIG. 80 when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.

It should be noted that the game balls flowing into the out zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36, but may have other winning regions (the general winning opening 35, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the first special variation). A game ball that has won the prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39) may be used.
The game balls flowing into the out zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have won one winning area, but may be the game balls that have won a plurality of winning areas. Specifically, for example, a flow path may be provided for guiding the game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the first guidance flow path 930a. In this case, in the out zone unit 900, a specific game (in the case of this modification, the game ball is a pseudo winning port 900a) using the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37. (Whether the game flows into the game or not).

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the winning area (in the case of the present modified example, the starting winning opening 36) and the inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the gaming ball that has won the winning area can flow. In the gaming machine provided with the above, in the inflow area, a specific game (in the case of the present modification, a game as to whether or not the gaming ball flows into the pseudo winning port 900a) is performed using the game ball that has won the winning area. The specific game mechanism to be performed (in the case of the present modified example, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a), and when it is determined that the result of the specific game is a predetermined result. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (in the case of the present modified example, an assist symbol effect).

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect using the game ball that may win the prize area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, a winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 36), an inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which a gaming ball that has won the winning area flows, In a gaming machine equipped with a ball effect mechanism (in the case of the present modification, the first guide flow path 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide flow Path 940a and a pseudo winning opening 900a), and the ball effect mechanism guides a specific region (pseudo winning opening 900a) into which a game ball winning the winning area can flow, and a game ball winning the winning area to the specific area. (In the case of the present modification, a rotating body 920).

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as the out area, an effect (game ball effect) using the game ball that has won the winning area can be performed. In the case of this modification, a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) into which a game ball can flow is provided behind the winning area, and a game ball that has won the winning area can be guided to the specific area. As an effect (game ball effect) using a game ball that has won a prize area, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear as if a game ball that has already won a prize area wins again in the prize area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Can be enhanced.

Also, the effect (game ball effect) performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) is an effect using the game ball that has won the prize area, and is not an effect using the game ball before winning in the prize area. , Can maintain the fairness and fairness of the game.
That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is configured such that only game balls that have won a winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 36) can enter the inside of the inflow area (out zone unit 900). . Specifically, for example, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900 from entering the inside of the first guide flow path member 930 or the like, an obstacle member (made of resin) is used. Projection-like or wall-like members), nails, and the like are provided.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the movable member (the rotator 920) can be configured to lift the gaming ball by rotating.
With this configuration, the game balls can be kept in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) for a long time, so that the effect of the effect (game ball effect) using the game balls winning in the winning area is enhanced. be able to.

The effect using the game ball that has won the winning area (game ball effect) is an effect that uses the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and a game that may win the winning area. Since it is not an effect using a ball, as an effect using a game ball that has won a prize area (game ball effect), an effect that cannot be performed using a game ball that may win a prize area, for example, As in the present modification, it is possible to perform an effect such that the game ball is lifted against gravity by the movable member (the rotator 920).
Note that the movable member is not limited to the rotating body 920, and can be appropriately changed. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can convert between a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored, and other V movable members provided in two types of pachinko machines. A movable member (a movable member capable of guiding a game ball to a specific area) may be used.

《Replay Direction》
The predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is not limited to the assist symbol effect, and can be appropriately changed. . The predetermined effect may be, for example, a replay effect (specifically, a re-change effect in the replay effect).
The replay effect is a temporary stop effect in which the decorative special figure variable display game is temporarily stopped in a predetermined result mode (for example, a loss result mode) in the middle of the special figure variable display game, and then a predetermined condition is satisfied ( In the case of the present modified example, the replay effect is to restart the decoration special figure variable display game that is temporarily stopped when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a). When the replay effect can be executed, the effect control device 300 executes the replay control process shown in FIG. 83, for example, in the main process (see FIG. 74 and the like).

For example, at the start of the special figure variation display game, a replay production possibility lottery for determining whether or not to perform a replay production during the special figure variation display game is performed. Perform replay effects during the game.
Specifically, for example, when the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 77 and the like) includes the content of the replay effect, it is determined that the replay effect possibility lottery has been won. If the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 is a content including a replay effect, display setting of a temporary stop effect in the replay effect is performed in step C523. Thereby, the decoration special figure variation display game is started, and after a predetermined time, the decoration special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped in a predetermined result mode.

[Replay control processing]
FIG. 83 shows the replay control processing in the main processing. In this replay control process, first, it is determined whether a temporary stop effect in the replay effect is being executed (the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped) (step C421).
When it is determined that the temporary stop effect is not being executed (step C421; N), the replay control process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop effect is being executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether or not the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (step C422).

When it is determined that the pseudo winning port switch has detected a game ball (step C422; Y), that is, when a game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning port 900a, the display setting of the re-change effect in the replay effect is performed (step C422). C423), and ends the replay control process. As a result, the temporarily stopped decorative special figure variation display game is restarted.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo winning port switch has not detected a game ball (step C422; N), that is, if no game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning port 900a, the decoration special figure change during the temporary stop It is determined whether the remaining time value of the display game is less than a predetermined threshold value (Step C424). Here, the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variable display game is a time value from the start of the decorative special figure variable display game to the present time based on a predetermined variable time of the decorative special figure variable display game. Is the time value of the difference obtained by subtracting.

When it is determined that the remaining time value of the temporarily stopped decorative special figure fluctuation display game is not less than the predetermined threshold value (step C424; N), the replay control processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time value of the temporarily-decorated decorative special figure fluctuation display game is less than the predetermined threshold (step C424; Y), the display setting of the re- fluctuation effect in the replay effect is performed (step C424). C423), and ends the replay control process. As a result, the temporarily stopped decorative special figure variation display game is restarted.

  The value of the fluctuation time of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is predetermined, and the temporary stop time is also counted as the fluctuation time. If the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a, or if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by the end of the fluctuating time of the temporary special decoration fluctuating display game being temporarily stopped, Cannot flow into the pseudo special prize port 900a to restart the temporarily stopped decorative special figure variation display game. Therefore, when the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variation display game during the temporary stop is less than the predetermined threshold (Step C425; Y), the temporary stop does not occur even if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. It is assumed that the middle special figure variation display game is restarted.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example changes from the first mode (for example, the mode for temporarily stopping the decorative special figure variable display game) to the second mode (for example, the mode for changing the decorative special figure variable display game). An effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a switchable predetermined effect (for example, a replay effect) is provided, and the effect control means performs a predetermined effect when a game ball flows into a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a). Can be switched from the first mode to the second mode.
To be more specific, the control device includes an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect that can be interrupted (for example, a replay effect). When a game ball flows into a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) in a state where the display game is temporarily stopped), the predetermined effect can be restarted.
With this configuration, a replay function using a game ball can be provided, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Also, when a predetermined effect that can be interrupted (for example, a replay effect) can be executed, the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a only when the decoration special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped, and the decoration special figure variation is performed. When the display game is not temporarily stopped, the game ball may be configured not to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
This configuration can be realized by, for example, rotating the rotating body 920 when the vehicle is temporarily stopped, and waiting without rotating the rotating body 920 when the vehicle is not temporarily stopped. In this case, there is a possibility that the first guiding flow path 930a overflows with a game ball while the rotation of the rotating body 920 is stopped. In the case of this modification, it is preferable to make the printer stand by in a state at the lowest position).
Further, in the configuration, for example, the specific game mechanism (the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning port 900a) in the out zone unit 900 is temporarily This can also be realized in a case where a pseudo prize winning state (described later) is set when the game is stopped, and a pseudo prize impossible state (described later) is set when the game is not temporarily stopped.

The predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) may be a resurrection effect.
Specifically, for example, in the case where a battle effect is performed in the final effect of SP reach or the like, the resurrection effect in which the ally character is resurrected is started when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a. Is also good. Further, similarly to the replay effect described above, when the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing, the resurrection effect is started even if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. It is also possible. In addition, a meter that notifies the number of game balls flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a (for example, the number of game balls flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a from a predetermined time to the present time) is displayed, and the level of the meter is displayed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the resurrection effect starts when the maximum is reached.
By performing such a resurrection effect, it is possible to increase the value added to the pseudo winning opening 900a, so that an improvement in interest can be expected.

Further, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is a hold display (decorative feature) displayed on the display device 41 or the like. A hold change effect may be used in which the display mode of the figure start storage display) is changed to a display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “final display mode”) that can suggest a prefetch result or the like.
Specifically, for example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold display in a display mode (for example, a white flashing intermediate mode or the like) for notifying that a hold change effect may be executed, The trigger for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed as described above to the final display mode may be an inflow of game balls into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which a final display mode is determined when a start memory is generated, and whether or not the display mode is changed every time the hold display corresponding to the start memory is shifted, a change possibility determination is performed. (Alternatively, a game machine that determines the final display mode and the change timing for changing the display mode when the start memory is generated) may be more pseudo-win than the result of the change possibility lottery (or the determined change timing). The inflow of game balls to the mouth 900a may be prioritized. When it is determined that the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the start memory is changed a plurality of times until the final display mode, for example, when the start memory is generated, the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a is triggered. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to the final display mode at a stretch, or the display mode of the hold display may be changed every time a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
Further, similarly to the replay effect described above, if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variable display game based on the start memory targeted for the hold change effect), Even if the ball does not win in the pseudo winning opening 900a, it is also possible to configure so as to perform the pending change effect.
By performing such a pending change effect, it is possible to draw attention to the inflow of game balls into the pseudo winning opening 900a. Further, since the relevance between the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a and the effect can be enhanced, an improvement in interest can be expected.

In addition, a specific image (such as a cut-in image or a character image) for notifying the degree of expectation of the variable display game during or before execution can be displayed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a. It is. Also in this case, an improvement in interest can be expected.
In addition, an effect that stocks the execution right of a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect for a predetermined variable display game) can be stocked, and a predetermined notification image that notifies the number of stocks of the execution right can be displayed on the display device 41 or the like. In the case of, the predetermined notification image can be displayed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 900a. Also in this case, an improvement in interest can be expected.

《Game ball look-ahead production》
In addition, it is also possible to notify (suggest) the pre-read result based on the result of the specific game (that is, whether or not a game ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a). That is, it is also possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect (game ball pre-reading effect) using a game ball that has won a prize area.
In this case, for example, the specific game mechanism (the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning port 900a) in the out zone unit 900 is changed to the pseudo winning port 900a. (Hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo winning possible state”) and a state in which gaming balls do not flow into the pseudo winning port 900a (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo winning impossible state”). Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to be capable of executing control for converting a specific game mechanism into a pseudo winning possible state and control for converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo winning impossible state. Then, by converting the specific game mechanism to a pseudo winning possible state, the player is more likely to have a high degree of expectation (reach is likely to occur, special result is likely to occur, etc.). By notifying that, and converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo winning impossible state, it is unlikely that the player will be in a state of high expectation (there is a low possibility of reaching, a possibility of a special result) Is low, etc.).

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the start winning port 36 forming the first starting winning port and the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 forming the second starting winning port, the game control apparatus 100 generates various random numbers (eg, a jackpot random number). ) Is extracted, and prior to the start of the special figure change display game based on the winning, a game result preliminary determination for determining a game result based on the winning in advance is performed. The result of the game result pre-determination is the pre-read result. That is, the pre-reading result is a determination result of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory, and the game is read before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300.

Specifically, as the pre-reading result, for example, a pre-reading symbol system command (a pre-reading symbol command including a result of a special figure variable display game based on a pre-reading target start memory) and a pre-reading variable system command (based on a pre-reading target start memory) A look-ahead variation pattern command including variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands including information necessary for executing a look-ahead announcement effect. The look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or look-ahead effect) is whether or not a special figure change display game corresponding to a start memory in which the special figure change display game has not been executed (reserved) becomes a big hit when the game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, a decoration start storage display displayed on the display device 41 or the like is performed in a mode different from the normal mode, or the display device 41 or the like is used. This is an effect that performs an effect display. The look-ahead command (the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command) is a command that notifies a variation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to a start memory (a look-ahead target start memory) to be a target of a prefetch notice effect in advance, It is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the start winning. Note that ordinary symbol commands and variation commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variation display.

  Here, when the effect control device 300 receives the look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 executes the look-ahead symbol command process shown in FIG. When a prefetch variable command is received, the prefetch variable command processing shown in FIG. 85 is executed.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 84 shows the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) in the received command analysis process (see FIG. 34). In this look-ahead symbol command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest suspension information is the special figure 1 suspension (step C811).
If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C811; Y), that is, if the received look-ahead design related command relates to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. It saves in the special figure 1 prefetching design command area (step C812), sets a prefetching variable command reception waiting flag (step C814), and ends the prefetching design command processing.

On the other hand, if the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C811; N), that is, if the received look-ahead design related command relates to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. In the special figure 2 prefetching symbol command area (step C813), a prefetching variable command reception waiting flag is set (step C814), and the prefetching symbol command processing is terminated.
The reason why the pre-reading variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C814 is that the pre-reading design command and the pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variation command processing]
FIG. 85 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34). In this prefetch variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch variation command reception is waiting (step C821). Here, when there is a prefetch variable command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting.
If it is not waiting for reception of the prefetch variable command (step C821; N), the prefetch variable command processing ends.
On the other hand, when waiting for reception of a prefetch variable command (step C821; Y), the prefetch variable command reception wait flag is cleared (step C822).

After that, in the processes of steps C823 to C826, a process of converting the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed.
First, a process (step C823) of setting a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and information on the special figure type in the start-up memory corresponding to the look-ahead variation command received this time is displayed. A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set in accordance with the current reserved number of the special figure type.

  Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C824). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C825), and a sub-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is obtained (step C826).

  The MODE includes information on the first half variation, but the content and time of the first half variation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of the determination, so the determination at the time of the preliminary determination and the start of the special figure variation display game are started. The judgment result may be different from the judgment at the time. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably perform the process of the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the number of reservations at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, and It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, there is a possibility that there is a short first-movement time depending on the situation of a hold without reach and a pending state, or a thing that has a long first-half change time regardless of the state of a hold without a reach, It is converted into MODE classified according to items to be considered in the setting of the prefetch notice effect, so that the process of the prefetch notice effect can be easily and reliably performed.

  Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of the reach and the type of the reach. The content of the second half change set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of suspensions at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, a case where the final stop symbol is stopped before one frame of the reach symbol, a portion where the final stop symbol is stopped one frame ahead, and a case of hitting are set. Since the ACTs corresponding to these are set, the value range is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number of the ACTs and reducing the processing load such as a check in the process of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C827).
If both the converted MODE and ACT are not other than 0 (step C827; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends because the command value is abnormal.
On the other hand, if both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (Step C827; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds (Step C828). A pre-read command consistency check process (step C829) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

As a result of the prefetch command consistency check processing (step C829), if the command combination is not normal (step C830; N), the prefetch variable command processing ends.
On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C830; Y), a look-ahead lottery process (step C831) for performing a lottery of a prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether a game ball prefetch effect is generated (step C832). ).
When the game ball pre-reading effect is not generated (step C832; N), it is determined whether a pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834).
On the other hand, when the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C832; Y), that is, when the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-fetch lottery process (step C831) includes the game ball pre-reading effect, the game ball pre-reading effect is supported. Is set (step C833), and it is determined whether a prefetch notice effect other than the game ball prefetch effect is generated (step C834).

If a prefetch announcement effect other than the game ball prefetch effect does not occur (step C834; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends.
On the other hand, when a look-ahead notice effect other than the game ball look-ahead effect is generated (step C834; Y), the look-ahead notice effect (i.e., the game ball) selected in the look-ahead notice effect (ie, the look-ahead lottery process (step C831)). It is determined whether the pre-reading effect other than the pre-reading effect) is an effect that starts immediately (step C835). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start storage display displayed on the display device 41 or the like from the current time. The effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead announcement effect performed during the execution of the special figure change display game, and an effect that generates a specific effect or a reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure change display games, There are effects such as an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, and a hold change notice of changing the display mode of the decoration start storage display at a timing later than the present time. When the execution of such an effect that does not immediately start is started during the execution of the special figure change display game, the special figure change display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure change display game starts. The timing to be performed corresponds to this.

If the effect does not start immediately (step C835; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game for executing a prefetch notice effect.
On the other hand, if the effect is to be started immediately (step C835; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching advancement effect (prefetching advancement effect other than the game ball prefetching effect) is set (step C836), and the prefetching variation system is set. Terminates command processing.

  In the prefetch lottery process (step C831), for example, when the start memory of the lottery target is the first start memory (that is, when the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold), the lottery for the game ball prefetch effect is performed as follows: This is executed together with the lottery for other prefetch notice effects. In the lottery for the game ball pre-reading effect, if the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the lottery target is a special result, the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the lottery target is not a special result. It is determined that the game ball prefetching effect is executed with a higher probability than the case (that is, the game ball prefetching effect is selected). Alternatively, when the reach effect occurs during the special figure change display game based on the lottery target start memory, the probability is higher than when the reach effect does not occur during the special figure change display game based on the lottery target start memory. It is determined that the game ball prefetching effect is to be executed (that is, the game ball prefetching effect is selected). Hereinafter, the game ball that has generated the starting memory of the lottery target is referred to as a “target game ball”.

  Then, when the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-fetch lottery process includes the game ball pre-reading effect (step C832; Y), an operation corresponding to the game ball pre-reading effect is set (step C833). When the operation corresponding to the game ball pre-reading effect is set, after a predetermined first time has elapsed, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from a false winning impossible state to a false winning possible state, and performs the conversion. After a lapse of a predetermined second time from, the specific game mechanism is changed from a pseudo winning possible state to a pseudo winning impossible state.

When the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, specifically, all the holes of the rotating body 920 are changed so as to become the game ball housing 920a. In the case where the discharge regulation wall 922 provided in each of the game ball housing portions 920a is changed to be openable and closable, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning possible state and a pseudo winning impossible state.
Specifically, the openable and closable discharge regulation wall 922 can regulate the discharge of the game ball (the game ball passes from the front to the rear of the hole) in the closed state, but is in the open state. It is not possible to regulate the discharge of game balls.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the discharge regulating wall 922 provided on the game ball housing portion 920a of the rotating body 920 is closed, the game ball flowing into the game ball housing portion 920a Is guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second guiding flow path 940a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the discharge regulating wall 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a of the rotating body 920 is open, the game ball flowing into the game ball housing portion 920a Is discharged to the ball discharge unit through the game ball storage section 920a.
That is, by closing all the discharge control walls 922 (or the discharge control walls 922 provided in the game ball accommodating portion 920a into which the target game ball is to flow), the specific game mechanism is in a pseudo winning possible state, When all the discharge control walls 922 (or the discharge control walls 922 provided in the game ball housing section 920a into which the target game ball is to flow) are opened, the specific game mechanism is in a state in which a pseudo prize cannot be won. In this case, it is possible to switch between the pseudo winning possible state and the pseudo winning impossible state while keeping the movement of the rotating body 920 constant. That is, since it is difficult for the player to determine at a glance whether the state is the pseudo winning possible state or the pseudo winning impossible state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even in the pseudo winning impossible state.

  As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize impossible state to the pseudo prize possible state after a lapse of a predetermined first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert the specific game mechanism from a pseudo winning possible state to a pseudo winning impossible state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required from the time when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 to the time when it flows into the hole of the rotating body 920. It is set in advance based on the length of the guide channel 930a and the like. The second time is, for example, the time required from when the game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 to when it flows into the second guiding flow path 940a, that is, when the hole of the rotating body 920 is at the first position (this position). In the case of the modified example, the time is slightly longer than the time required to move from the lowermost position) to the second position (in this modified example, the uppermost position). Is set.

  Thus, for example, at a timing immediately before the target game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 (timing that is presumed to be immediately before flowing), the specific game mechanism is changed from a pseudo winning impossible state to a pseudo winning possible state. At the timing immediately after the target game ball has flowed into the second guiding flow path 940a (at the timing presumed immediately after flowing), the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo winning possible state to the pseudo winning impossible state. Can be converted to

Alternatively, when the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed to, for example, as shown in FIG. 941) so as to be rotatable around the rotation body 920 so that all of the holes of the rotating body 920 become the game ball accommodating portion 920a (the game ball accommodating portion 920a having the discharge regulating wall 922 that cannot be opened and closed). Also in the case of the change, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning possible state and a pseudo winning impossible state.
Specifically, the rotatable second guide flow path member 940 is rotated, so that the upstream side of the second guide flow path 940a is arranged at a position higher than the downstream side. The upstream side of the second guide flow path 940a can be converted into the upstream low state arranged at a position lower than the downstream side.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the second guiding flow path member 940 is in the high state on the upstream side, the game balls flowing into the second guiding flow path 940a are shifted to the downstream side (pseudo winning opening). 900 a), falls from the second guide channel member 940, and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900 a.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), for example, when the second guiding flow path member 940 is in the low state on the upstream side, the game ball flowing into the second guiding flow path 940a is not on the downstream side (pseudo winning opening). It flows down to the opposite side from the (900a side), falls from the second guide channel member 940, and flows into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, when the second guide flow path member 940 is changed to the upstream high state, the specific game mechanism is set to the pseudo prize winning state, and when the second guide flow path member 940 is changed to the upstream low state, the specific game mechanism is specified. The game mechanism is in a state in which a pseudo prize cannot be won.

  As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize impossible state to the pseudo prize possible state after a lapse of a predetermined first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert the specific game mechanism from a pseudo winning possible state to a pseudo winning impossible state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 87, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required from the time when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 to the time when the game ball flows into the second guiding flow path 940a. It is set in advance based on the length of the guide channel 930a, the rotation speed of the rotating body 920, and the like. The second time is, for example, a time slightly longer than the time required for the game ball to flow from the second guiding flow path 940a to flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a, and is equal to the length of the second guiding flow path 940a. It is set in advance based on, for example,

  Thereby, for example, at a timing immediately before the target game ball flows into the second guidance flow path 940a (a timing presumed to be immediately before flowing), the specific game mechanism is changed from a pseudo winning impossible state to a pseudo winning possible state. At the timing immediately after the target gaming ball has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a (timing assumed immediately after flowing), the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo winning possible state to the pseudo winning impossible state. It is possible to do.

When the out zone unit 900 shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, specifically, the first guide flow path 930a is divided into the branch flow path 930b (divided from the first guide flow path 930a). In this case, the opening and closing door 931 is provided at the branch point to the branch channel 930b, and all the holes of the rotating body 920 are provided with the game ball housing portion 920a (the discharge regulating wall 922 that cannot be opened and closed). Also, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo prize possible state and a pseudo prize impossible state in a case where the game ball accommodating section 920a) is changed.
Specifically, the opening and closing door 931 is rotated to open a downstream portion of the first guide channel 930a and close an inlet of the branch channel 930b, and a main flow open state, and The state can be changed to a main flow closed state in which the entrance of the downstream portion of 930a is closed and the entrance of the branch channel 930b is opened.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the opening / closing door 931 is in the main flow open state, a game ball flowing down the first guide channel 930a is located at a downstream portion of the first guide channel 930a. After entering, it flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 (the game ball accommodating section 920a), and is guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second guiding flow path 940a.
On the other hand, as shown in, for example, FIG. 88 (b), when the opening / closing door 931 is in the main flow closed state, the game ball flowing down the first guiding flow path 930a enters the branch flow path 930b, and the first guiding flow is performed. It falls from the flow path member 930 and flows into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, the specific game mechanism is in a pseudo winning possible state by converting the open / close door 931 to the main flow open state, and the specific game mechanism is in a pseudo win impossible state by converting the open / close door 931 to the main flow closed state. .

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize impossible state to the pseudo prize possible state after a lapse of a predetermined first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined second time from the conversion, It is configured to convert a specific game mechanism from a pseudo winning possible state to a pseudo winning impossible state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 88, the first time and the second time are set in advance based on, for example, the length of the first guide channel 930a and the position of the branch channel 930b.
Specifically, the first time is, for example, at a timing immediately before the target game ball arrives at the branch point to the branch channel 930b (timing presumed to be immediately before arrival), and the specific game mechanism is set to the pseudo-winning impossible state. Is set to a time at which it is possible to convert to a pseudo winning possible state. The second time is, for example, a timing immediately after the target game ball has passed through the entrance of the downstream portion of the first guide channel 930a (that is, the entrance (front end) of the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30). At a timing (estimated immediately after passing), the time is set so that the specific game mechanism can be converted from the pseudo prize possible state to the pseudo prize impossible state.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example has a winning area (in the case of the present modified example, the starting winning opening 36) and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the gaming ball that has won the winning area flows. In the provided gaming machine, in the inflow area, a specific game in which a specific game (in this modified example, a game as to whether or not a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) using a game ball that has won a prize area. The mechanism (in the case of the present modification, the first guide channel 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide channel 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) and predetermined information (in the case of the present modification, the prefetch result) are transmitted to the specific game. And an informing means (effect control device 300) for informing based on the result of (1).

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (playing ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be reported based on the result of the specific game. Can enhance the interest of the people.
Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect using the game ball that may win the prize area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the present modification includes a prize storage unit (production control device 300) that stores a prize memory based on a prize of a game ball to a prize area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning port 36), and a prize. Based on the memory, a game executing means (effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) based on a plurality of pieces of identification information, a prize memory, and a variable display game based on the prize memory. And a notifying means (effect control device 300) for notifying the determination result (pre-reading result) of the prior determining means based on the result of the specific game. It is possible.

With this configuration, the result of the pre-reading can be notified based on the result of the specific game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The predetermined information to be notified by the result of the specific game is not limited to the pre-reading result, that is, the game result of the variable display game before execution (information related to the result of the undigested variation), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game result (information related to the result of the fluctuation during digestion) of the running fluctuation display game may be used.

《Gaming ball storage device》
In addition, the out zone unit 900 may include a game ball storage device 960.
FIG. 89A is a perspective view of the out zone unit 900 including the game ball storage device 960 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 89B is a perspective view of the game ball storage device 960 as viewed from the front side. is there.
As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the game ball storage device 960 includes, for example, a case member 961 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, and an opening / closing member 962 for opening and closing an outlet 961b provided in the case member 961. , An opening / closing drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the opening / closing member 962.
The front wall of the case member 961 is provided with an inflow port 961a of a size through which a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction can pass. The right side wall of the case member 961 is provided with an outlet 961b of a size that allows game balls penetrating in the left-right direction to pass therethrough. Note that the arrangement position of the inflow port 961a and the arrangement position of the outflow port 961b can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the outflow port 961b may be provided, for example, on the bottom wall of the case member 961.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the inflow port 961a of the case member 961 is connected to the rear end of the winning opening forming member 910. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a passes through the opening 912 of the winning opening forming member 910, enters the inside of the case member 961 from the inflow port 961a of the case member 961, and enters the case member 961. 961.
The case member 961 has optical transparency so that the game balls stored inside the case member 961 can be visually recognized from the front. That is, the case member 961 is a transparent or translucent member.

The opening / closing member 962 has a state in which the outflow port 961b of the case member 961 is closed as shown in FIG. 89A, for example, and a state in which the outflow port 961b of the case member 961 is opened as shown in FIG. 89B. It can be converted to a state. When the opening / closing member 962 is opened, the game balls stored in the case member 961 pass through the outlet 961b and are discharged to the ball discharging unit.
The effect control device 300 converts the open / close member 962 from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined open timing, and closes the open / close member 962 from an open state at a predetermined close timing. It is configured to be converted to a state in which the state is changed.

Here, the opening timing at which the opening / closing member 962 is converted to the open state can be appropriately selected. For example, the opening timing may be when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing timing, or may be stored inside the case member 961. The time may be when the number of game balls in the game exceeds a predetermined threshold value, when the player operates the operation means (for example, the effect button 25) in a predetermined operation mode, or when a predetermined effect May be at the start (or at the end) or at the start (or at the end) of the variable display game. The number of game balls stored in the case member 961 can be determined, for example, by counting the number of times the pseudo winning opening switch detects the game balls.
The closing timing for converting the opening and closing member 962 to the closed state can be appropriately selected, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening timing. The predetermined time is, for example, slightly longer than the time required to discharge all the game balls in the case member 961 when the inside of the case member 961 is full of game balls, and the size of the case member 961 It is set in advance based on the shape and shape.

Thus, by providing the game ball storage device 960 in the out zone unit 900 and storing the game balls flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a inside the case member 961, the amount of the game balls winning the starting winning opening 36 is obtained. Can be realized by the player.
In addition, it is preferable that all the holes of the rotating body 920 are the game ball housing portions 920a, for example, from the viewpoint of storing all the game balls that have won the start winning port 36 inside the case member 961.

《Start winning prize unit》
Instead of the out zone unit 900, a start winning unit 360 may be provided. That is, in the gaming board 30 of the present modified example, the starting winning unit 360 including the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port, starting winning area) and the pseudo winning port 360a is disposed above the out port 30a. May be.

FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a main part of the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 including the start winning unit 360, and is a view (front view) viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 90, the start winning unit 360 is attached to, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 361, a passage opening forming member 362 attached to an upper portion of the base member 361, and a substantially central portion of the base member 361. And a rotating body 363.
On the left and right sides of the rotating body 363 of the base member 361, a pseudo winning opening 360a is provided. An outlet 364 is provided above the rotating body 363 and below the passage forming member 362 in the base member 361.

The passage opening forming member 362 forms a passage opening 362a that opens toward the upper portion (stage section 32S). The game ball that has flowed into the passage port 362a passes through, for example, a back flow path (not shown) provided on the rear side of the base member 361, and flows out of the base member 361 through an outlet 364 provided in the base member 361. It flows out to the front side (that is, inside the start winning unit 360).
The passage port 362a has a shape that looks like a normal starting port. Thus, although the game ball that has actually entered the inside of the start winning unit 360 can win the start winning opening 36, the passing opening 362a is made to look like a normal starting opening, so that the starting opening (for example, It is possible to make it appear as if the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36) enters the inside of the starting winning unit 360.

On the front side of the base member 361, a rib-shaped left extending wall 365 and a right extending wall 366 extending forward are provided.
The left extension wall 365 forms a guiding flow path for guiding the game ball flowing out of the outlet 364 to the pseudo winning opening 360a on the left side.
In addition, the right extension wall 366 forms a guiding flow path that guides the game ball flowing out of the outflow port 364 to the pseudo winning opening 360a on the right side.

Furthermore, the left extension wall 365 and the right extension wall 366 also have a function of preventing a game ball flowing down around the start winning unit 360 from entering the inside. Specifically, the inside of the start winning unit 360 is surrounded by the passage opening forming member 362, the rotating body 363, the left extension wall 365, and the right extension wall 366, thereby flowing into the passage opening 362a. A game ball other than the game ball is prevented from entering the inside of the start winning unit 360. That is, only the game ball that has flowed into the passage 362a can enter the inside of the start winning unit 360.
It is preferable that at least a portion of the front surface of the base member 361 surrounded by the passage opening forming member 362, the rotating body 363, the left extending wall 365, and the right extending wall 366 be decorated. .

The rotating body 363 has, for example, a shape in which a concave portion is formed in the disk member by depressing a part of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the center, and the starting winning opening 36 is formed in the concave portion. I have. The rotating body 363 is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed. The rotator 363 may be configured to rotate at a constant speed in a fixed direction (for example, clockwise as viewed from the front side).
By rotating the rotator 363 right and left, it is possible to convert a game ball flowing out of the outflow port 364 into a winning possible state in which the game ball can enter the starting winning opening 36 and a difficult winning state (or impossible to win). It is.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), a state in which the starting winning port 36 faces the outlet 364 is a winable state.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the starting winning port 36 faces the left pseudo winning port 360a, or, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the starting winning port 36 becomes the right pseudo winning port. The state facing 360a is a winning difficulty state. When the game ball that has flowed out of the outlet 364 cannot flow into the starting winning opening 36, such as when the rotating body 363 is in a winning difficulty state, the gaming ball is a pseudo winning opening 360a on the left or a pseudo winning opening on the right. 360a.

The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 (that is, the game ball that has flowed into the start port 36 and detected by the start port 1 switch 36a) is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
Further, the game balls flowing into the pseudo winning opening 360a are also discharged to the ball discharging unit. The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 360a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.

As described above, the start winning unit 360 can internally distribute the game balls flowing into the passage 362a to the start winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 360a, thereby increasing the interest of the game. When the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 360a (that is, when the winning ball 36 does not win), a predetermined effect is executed. The disappointment and loss feeling of the player can be reduced.
The inside of the start winning unit 360 is visible from the front.

  When a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 360a (ie, when a detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect controlling device 300), the effect control device 300 performs a predetermined effect (pseudo winning opening). The effect memory which is the execution right of the effect (the effect executed when the game ball flows into the 360a) may be stored, and the number of unprocessed effect memories may be displayed. It is preferable to display the number of unprocessed effect memories so as to be distinguishable from the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the unprocessed start memory.

《Modification of Out Zone Unit》
The out zone unit provided above the out port 30a and provided with the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port, starting winning area) and the pseudo winning port is limited to the out zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82. Alternatively, the out-zone unit 1900 shown in FIG. 92 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 92, for example, the out zone unit 1900 is attached to a substantially plate-shaped base member 1910, a distribution member 1920 attached to an upper portion of the base member 1910, and an approximate center of the base member 1910. It comprises a rotator 1930 and a ball rolling member 1940 attached to the right part of the base member 1910.
A start winning port 36 is provided above the distribution member 1920 of the base member 1910, and a pseudo winning port 1900a is provided below the ball rolling member 1940 of the base member 1910. In addition, an upper out port 1911 is provided behind the distribution member 1920 in the base member 1910, and a lower out port 1912 is provided below the rotating body 1930 in the base member 1910. An outlet 1913 is provided above the distribution member 1920 of the base member 361 and below the start winning port 36.

  The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 passes through, for example, a back flow path (not shown) provided on the rear side of the base member 1910, and flows out of an outlet 1913 provided in the base member 1910 to the base member 1910. Out (ie, inside the out zone unit 1900).

On the front side of the base member 1910, a rib-shaped left outer extension wall 1951, a left inner extension wall 1952, a right outer extension wall 1953, a right inner extension wall 1954, and an entry prevention wall 1955 extending forward. Is provided.
The left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952 form a guiding flow path that guides the game balls flowing out of the outlet 1913 and distributed to the left side by the distribution member 1920 to the lower out port 1912. ing.
In addition, the right outer extension wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954 serve as guide flow paths for guiding game balls flowing out of the outlet 1913 and distributed to the right side by the distribution member 1920 to the ball rolling member 1940. Has formed.

  The entry prevention wall 1955, together with the left outside extension wall 1951 and the right outside extension wall 1953, prevents entry of a game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 1900. Specifically, the inside of the out zone unit 1900 is surrounded by a left outer extension wall 1951, a right outer extension wall 1953, and an entry prevention wall 1955. A game ball other than the above is prevented from entering the inside of the out zone unit 1900. That is, only game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 can enter the inside of the out zone unit 1900.

The distribution member 1920 is, for example, a substantially V-shaped member having a concave portion 1921, and the concave portion 1921 can receive a game ball. The distribution member 1920 is configured to rotate left and right at a constant speed about a rotation shaft 1922.
The distributing member 1920 is rotated left and right to receive the game ball flowing into the starting winning opening 36 and flowing out of the outlet 1913 in the concave portion 1921 and to distribute the game ball to the rear side (upper out port 1911). And a left-hand distribution state in which game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are distributed to the left, and a right-hand distribution in which game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 are distributed to the right. It can be converted to minute state.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), a state in which the concave portion 1921 faces upward (start winning opening 36) is a rearward distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the rearward distribution state, the game ball which has won the starting winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distribution member 1920 and formed behind the distribution member 1920. Flows into the upper out port 1911 and discharged to the ball discharge unit.
In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), a state where the concave portion 1921 faces right is a left distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the left distribution state, game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outflow port 1913 are separated from the left side surface, the left outer extension wall 1951, and the left inner extension wall of the distribution member 1920. In 1952, it is guided to the lower outlet 1912. The game ball that has flowed into the lower out port 1912 is discharged to a ball discharging unit.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), a state where the concave portion 1921 faces left is a right distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the right distribution state, the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outflow port 1913 are the right side surface, the right outside extension wall 1953, and the right inside extension wall of the distribution member 1920. By 1954, it is guided to the ball rolling member 1940. The game ball guided to the ball rolling member 1940 flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a via the ball rolling member 1940, and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.

The rotator 1930 is a disk-shaped member, and is disposed in a state where the thickness direction substantially matches the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10. The rotating body 1930 rotates at a constant speed in a fixed direction (in this case, clockwise as viewed from the front side).
The rotating body 1930 contains a magnet. The magnet is for attracting (holding in contact with) a game ball in contact with the magnet arrangement location (the location where the magnet is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1930. When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930, it is attracted to the magnet arrangement location, lifted up from below by the rotating rotating body 1930, and guided to the ball rolling member 1940.

Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower out port 1912, it does not flow into the lower out port 1912. , To the ball rolling member 1940.
On the other hand, the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 flows into the lower out port 1912 when it is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930.
In the example shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, there is only one magnet location on the rotating body 1930 (specifically, a location indicated by a triangular pattern applied to the front surface of the rotating body 1930). There may be a plurality of locations.

  The ball rolling member 1940 is a circular dish-shaped member, which is a so-called clune. The upper surface of the ball rolling member 1940 has an inclined surface descending toward the center. A communication hole 1941 for flowing down to 1900a is formed. The game ball that has flowed into the ball rolling member 1940 gradually flows down to the center while circling, and flows down from the communication hole 1941 to the pseudo winning opening 1900a.

  The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, for example, an effect in which a glowing character or a group of characters appears is executed.

For example, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to perform a distribution effect of rotating the distribution member 1920 with the starting memory stored based on the winning as a lottery target. A lottery for determining whether or not to make a distribution effect is performed. This sorting effect is a kind of pre-reading notice effect, and in the sorting effect availability lottery, for example, if the result of the special figure change display game based on the starting memory of the lottery object is a special result, the start of the lottery target It is determined that the distribution effect is executed with a higher probability than when the result of the special figure change display game based on the memory is not a special result. In other words, it can be said that the distribution effect is an effect having a high degree of expectation (big hit expectation).
As the distribution effects, a left distribution weak production, a left distribution strong production, and a right distribution production are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of, for example, left distribution weak effect <right distribution effect <left distribution strong effect.

For example, the distribution member 1920 rotates only in the distribution effect, and maintains the initial state (rearrangement state) at other times. Therefore, when it is determined that the distribution effect is not to be executed in the distribution effect possibility lottery, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distribution member 1920. And flows into the upper out port 1911.
On the other hand, when the execution of the right distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect possibility lottery, the production control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to change the initial distribution state (rear distribution state) to the right distribution state. Convert to As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning port 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning port 1900a.

  In addition, when the execution of the left distribution strong production is determined in the distribution production possibility lottery, the production control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to change the left distribution from the initial state (the rear distribution state). Convert to state. Thus, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. The rotator 1930 rotates only when, for example, a left-handed strong effect is produced, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left-hand distribution strong effect is attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the rotation The body 1930 guides the ball rolling member 1940 to flow into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if the magnet is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower out port 1912, it flows into the lower out port 1912. In this way, in the left-handed high-strength effect, it is possible to perform a loser-revitalized effect in which a game ball that may flow into the lower out port 1912 flows into the pseudo winning port 1900a. Interestingness improves.

  In addition, when the execution of the left distribution weak production is determined in the distribution production possibility lottery, the production control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to change the left distribution from the initial state (the rear distribution state). Convert to state. Thus, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. During the rotation stop, the rotator 1930 is in a state where the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet arrangement location (for example, the magnet arrangement location is directed upward (opposite to the lower out port 1912)). State). Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out-port 1912 in the weak left-hand distribution effect does not adsorb to the magnet-arranged portion of the rotating body 1930, and flows into the lower out-port 1912.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 provided with the out zone unit 1900, in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), the specific game (eg, the starting winning prize port 36) is used by using the game ball that has won the winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36). For example, a specific game mechanism (for example, a game for determining whether or not a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a) (for example, a guide channel formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952, a right outer extension) The guide flow path formed by the exit wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954, the distribution member 1920, the rotating body 1930, the ball rolling member 1940, and the pseudo winning port 1900a), and the result of the specific game is a predetermined result. When it is determined, an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a glowing character or a group of characters appears). It has a, and.

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Also, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect using the game ball that has a possibility of winning in the prize area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 including the out zone unit 1900, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to include a notifying unit (effect control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (for example, a pre-read result) based on a result of a specific game.
Here, the result of the specific game is, for example, “the game ball has flowed into the upper out port 1911 (that is, the distribution effect has not been executed)”, or “the game ball has been distributed to the left side and the lower ball has been out. Into the mouth 1912 (i.e., a left-handed weak effect was performed) ", and" the gaming ball was distributed to the left and flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (i.e., the left-handed strong production was performed) ". "The game ball is distributed to the right side and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (that is, the right distribution effect has been executed)."

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be reported based on a result of the specific game. Can enhance the interest of the people.
Also, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect using the game ball that has a possibility of winning in the prize area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

<Modified example of distribution effect>
Here, a modification of the distribution effect of rotating the distribution member 1920 will be described. Specifically, an example is shown in which the currently set probability setting value and the big hit history are suggested according to the effect form of the distribution effect.
As described above, as the distribution effects, the left distribution weak production (distribution production in the left distribution weak mode), the left distribution strong production (the distribution production in the left distribution strong mode), and the right distribution production (right Distribution effect in the distribution mode) is set. In other words, there are a left distribution weak mode, a left distribution high mode, and a right distribution mode in the distribution mode. Then, the expected value (big hit expectation degree or the like) is higher in the order of, for example, left-hand distribution weak effect <right-hand distribution effect <left-hand distribution strong effect. That is, in the above-described distribution effect, an expected value (eg, a jackpot expectation degree) can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.

The information that can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect is not limited to the expected value and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the currently set probability setting value may be used.
Specifically, for example, when a game ball wins in the start winning port 36, the effect control device 300 sorts the start memory stored based on the winning with a lottery target and rotates the distribution member 1920. Is performed to determine whether or not to perform the distribution effect.
For example, the distribution member 1920 rotates only in the distribution effect, and maintains the initial state (rearrangement state) at other times. Therefore, when the distribution effect is not won in the distribution effect possibility lottery (when the non-execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect propriety lottery), the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913. Is received by the concave portion 1921 of the sorting member 1920 and flows into the upper outlet 1911.

On the other hand, when the distribution effect possible lottery is won (when the execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect possible lottery), the effect control device 300 determines the distribution based on the currently set probability setting value. The effect mode of the split effect is determined, and the distribution effect is executed in the determined effect mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 94A, when the currently set probability setting value is “3” or “4”, the distribution effect in the right distribution mode (right distribution effect) is executed. You. Specifically, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to convert the initial state (rearrangement state) to the right distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning port 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning port 1900a. That is, in this case, the right flow path (the guide flow path formed by the right outer extension wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954) is selected as the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes. .

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is “5” or “6”, the distribution effect in the strong left distribution mode (the strong left distribution effect) ) Is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 turns the distribution member 1920 to convert from the initial state (rear distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. The rotator 1930 rotates only when, for example, a left-handed strong effect is produced, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 in the left-hand distribution strong effect is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 which rotates before flowing into the lower out port 1912, the rotation The body 1930 guides the ball rolling member 1940 to flow into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if the magnet is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower out port 1912, it flows into the lower out port 1912. That is, in this case, as the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes, the flow path with the left rotation (the left flow path (the induced flow formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952) Path) + rotation of the rotating body 1930) is selected.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the currently set probability setting value is “1” or “2”, the distribution effect in the weak left distribution mode (the left distribution weak production) ) Is executed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 converts the initial state (rearrangement state) to the left distribution state by rotating the distribution member 1920. Thus, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 and has flowed out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the lower out opening 1912. During the rotation stop, the rotator 1930 is in a state where the game ball guided to the lower out port 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet arrangement location (for example, the magnet arrangement location is directed upward (opposite to the lower out port 1912)). State). Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower out-port 1912 in the weak left-hand distribution effect does not adsorb to the magnet-arranged portion of the rotating body 1930, and flows into the lower out-port 1912. That is, in this case, as the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the out zone unit 1900 passes, the left non-rotation flow path (the left flow path (the induced flow formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952) Path) + no rotation of the rotating body 1930) is selected.

Thereby, by executing the distribution effect, it can be suggested that the distribution effect possibility lottery has been won (that is, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the case where the distribution effect possibility lottery has not been won). At the same time, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.
The flow path that is selected as the flow path through which the game balls flowing into the out zone unit 1900 pass (hereinafter, referred to as the “out ball pass flow path”) differs depending on the effect mode of the distribution effect. Therefore, in the case of the present modification, it can be said that the currently set probability set value can be suggested by the selected out ball passage passage.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example uses the gaming ball that has won the winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36) in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) to use the specific game (for example, the selected game). A specific game mechanism (for example, a left flow path (a guide flow path formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952) that performs a game of which out ball passage flow path is selected), a right flow path (A guide channel formed by the right outer extension wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954), a distribution member 1920, and a rotating body 1930).

Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Also, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect using the game ball that has a possibility of winning in the prize area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example can be configured to include a notifying unit (effect control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value) based on a result of a specific game.
Here, the result of the specific game is, for example, “the selected out-ball passage channel is“ left-side non-rotation channel ””, or “the selected out-ball passage channel is“ right-side channel ”. Yes "or" The selected out-sphere passage flow path is a "left-rotation flow path". "
Therefore, a specific game (game ball effect) can be performed in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified based on a result of the specific game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
The inflow area is not limited to the out zone unit 1900 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the out zone unit 800 may be used, the out zone unit 900 may be used, and the start winning unit 360 may be used. May be.

Further, the selectivity of the flow path corresponding to the currently set probability setting value need not be 100%. That is, it is also possible to select a flow path that does not correspond to the probability set value, and to make the selectivity of the flow path corresponding to the probability set value higher than the selectivity of the flow path that does not correspond to the probability set value. .
Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 94A, the flow path corresponding to the probability setting value “3” or “4” is the right flow path, and the non-corresponding flow path is the left non-rotation flow path. In this case, not only the right flow path but also the left non-rotation flow path and the left rotation flow path can be selected. The right channel may have a higher selectivity than the above selectivity. In the case of such a configuration, the player can infer that the currently set probability set value is “3” or “4” based on the tendency that the right channel is likely to be selected. . Other probability setting values can be similarly configured. Therefore, even in the case of such a configuration, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the selected out ball passage flow path (that is, the production mode of the distribution effect).

Further, the information suggested by the selected out-ball passage flow path (that is, the information suggested by the effect form of the distribution effect) is not limited to the currently set probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate.
More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), a big hit history may be indicated by the selected out ball passage channel. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 94 (b), the player determines that the selected out ball passage channel is the “left-side non-rotating channel” (or the “left-side non-rotating channel” is most likely to be selected). , It can be estimated that the cumulative value of the number of big hits is less than 15, and when the selected out ball passage channel is the “right channel” (or the “right channel” is most likely to be selected). In this case, it can be estimated that the cumulative value of the number of big hits is 15 or more and less than 30 times, and when the selected out-ball passage channel is the “left-handed channel” (or “the left-handed channel”). In the case where “the existing channel” is most easily selected), it can be estimated that the cumulative value of the big hit is 30 times or more. Of course, the big hit history suggested by the selected out ball passage channel is not limited to the cumulative value of the number of big hits (total value of the number of special game state occurrences from a predetermined time to the present time), and can be changed as appropriate. , The cumulative value of the number of consecutive chan (the total value of the number of consecutive chan from the predetermined time to the current time).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, a game (a special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state is generated when the result of the game is a special result. In a possible gaming machine, a plurality of flow paths through which a game ball can pass (for example, a flow path without left rotation, a flow path with right rotation, and a flow path with left rotation) and predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value) Means for selecting a flow path through which a game ball passes from among a plurality of flow paths based on the information, and a switching means (distribution member 1920) for switching the flow path in accordance with the selection result of the selection means. , A rotating body 1930).
Therefore, the predetermined information can be suggested by the flow path through which the game ball passes. That is, as an effect using the game ball, an effect indicating the predetermined information can be performed, so that the effect of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, a setting means capable of setting one probability set value from among a plurality of probability set values to which probability values used for a lottery of a game (a special figure change display game) are assigned. (Game control device 100), and the predetermined information can be configured to be a probability set value (probability set value currently set) set by the setting means (see FIG. 94 (a)).
With this configuration, as an effect using the game ball, an effect indicating the probability set value (probability set value currently set) set by the setting unit can be performed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the effects used.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the predetermined information can be configured to be history information (big hit history) relating to a special result (see FIG. 94 (b)).
With such a configuration, as an effect using the game ball, an effect suggesting history information (big hit history) relating to the special result can be performed, so that the effect of the effect using the game ball can be enhanced.

  The predetermined information is not limited to the probability setting value set by the setting unit (currently set probability setting value) or the history information (big hit history) relating to the special result. The predetermined information may be, for example, a base value or an accessory ratio. Here, the base value is a payout based on the number of game balls detected by an out switch for detecting all game balls (safe balls and out balls) fired in the game area 32 and completing the game, and a winning in the prize area. The information required to display the base value, which is a value calculated from the number, includes, for example, information about the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information about the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. . In addition, the ratio of bonuses is, during the state of the big hit (that is, fanfare and ending), of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. This is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of balls obtained for each role) obtained by winning the special winning opening in the special winning opening (so-called continuous role ratio), and information necessary to display the ratio of the role The information includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of acquired balls for each role).

Also, for example, below the normal symbol starting gate 34, a plurality of guiding flow paths capable of guiding game balls to the starting winning port 36 (or the general winning port 35), a constantly rotating distribution member, A switching means (for example, a guide valve) for switching the guide channel through which the ball passes among the plurality of guide channels is provided, and the guide channel is set according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability set value). You may comprise so that it may switch. Specifically, for example, in the plurality of guiding flow paths, an advantageous guiding flow path in which the game ball is easily guided to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35), and the gaming ball is located in the starting winning opening 36 (or There is a disadvantageous guide channel that is difficult to be guided to the general winning opening 35), and the switching means is an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entrance of the guide channel provided in each of the plurality of guide channels, and usually the symbol design is started. The game ball that has passed through the gate 34 is guided by the distribution member to the plurality of guide channels, and the guide channel whose entrance is open among the plurality of guide channels (that is, the guide channel selected based on the predetermined information). (Induction channel).
In the case of such a configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that the guiding flow path that is advantageous as the guiding flow path through which the game ball passes is selected. May be. In this case, the control of the switching means may be performed by the game control device 100 instead of the effect control device 300. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the switching means may be operated (switching operation) when the game ball normally passes through the symbol start gate 34.

In addition, for example, on the stage 32S, a plurality of guiding flow paths that can guide game balls to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35), and a plurality of guiding flow paths through which the game balls pass are formed by the plurality of guiding flows. Switching means (for example, an induction valve) for switching in the road may be provided so that the induction flow path is switched according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability setting value).
In the case of such a configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that the guiding flow path that is advantageous as the guiding flow path through which the game ball passes is selected. May be. In this case, the control of the switching means may be performed by the game control device 100 instead of the effect control device 300.

In addition, for example, a plurality of guide channels capable of guiding a game ball to a specific region (for example, a V region) and a guide channel through which the game ball passes are switched among the plurality of guide channels in the special winning opening. Switching means (for example, an induction valve) may be provided to switch the induction flow path according to predetermined information (for example, a currently set probability set value).
In the case of such a configuration, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that the guiding flow path that is advantageous as the guiding flow path through which the game ball passes is selected. May be. In this case, the control of the switching means may be performed by the game control device 100 instead of the effect control device 300.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the special game state is set. In a gaming machine capable of generating a game, a specific game execution means (production control device 300) for executing a specific game different from the variable display game (for example, a game as to which of the selected out-ball passage paths is). Setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability set value from among a plurality of probability set values to which a probability value used for a random display game lottery is assigned; The probability setting value set by the setting means (the currently set probability setting value) can be suggested. Specifically, in the case of the present modified example, the specific game result mode is such that “the selected out-ball passage channel is“ left-side non-rotation channel ”” and “the selected out-ball passage channel is“ "The right flow path" or "the selected out-sphere passage flow path is the" left rotation flow path ".
Therefore, as a game different from the variable display game, a specific game that can suggest the currently set probability setting value can be performed, and the interest of the game different from the variable display game can be enhanced.
The information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game is not limited to the currently set probability set value, and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a big hit history.

<Modification of specific game>
The specific game different from the variable display game is not limited to a game performed in the out zone unit (for example, a game in which the selected out ball passage channel is), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the specific game different from the variable display game may be, for example, a game to be executed in response to a pseudo prize.
As a game executed at the time of the pseudo prize, a roulette effect is exemplified.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when a game ball flows into a pseudo winning opening 1900a (or a pseudo winning opening 870 or a pseudo winning opening 900a), a plurality of character images are displayed. A roulette effect in which the included roulette image rotates and the roulette image stops at a predetermined timing may be executed.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the currently set probability setting value may be suggested according to the result mode of the roulette effect. In the example shown in FIG. 95 (b), when the first character stops at the position of the arrow (or when the first character is most likely to stop at the position of the arrow), the player is set to the current setting. It can be estimated that the set probability value is “1” or “2”, and when the second character stops at the position of the arrow (or when the second character stops most easily at the position of the arrow) Can be estimated that the currently set probability setting value is “3” or “4”, and the third character stops at the position of the arrow (or the third character is most likely to be at the position of the arrow). If it is easy to stop), it can be estimated that the currently set probability set value is “5” or “6”. For example, in the roulette effect shown in FIG. 95 (a), since the second character is stopped at the position of the arrow as a result mode of the roulette effect, the currently set probability setting value is “3” or “4”. Is suggested.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the variable display game (the special figure variable display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the special In a gaming machine capable of generating a gaming state, a specific game execution means (production control device 300) for executing a specific game (for example, a roulette effect) different from the variable display game, and a probability value used for a lottery of the variable display game are assigned. Setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from among the plurality of probability setting values obtained, and the probability setting value set by the setting means depending on the result mode of the specific game ( (The currently set probability setting value). Specifically, in the case of the present modification, the result mode of the specific game is one of “stop at the first character”, “stop at the second character”, and “stop at the third character”.
Therefore, as a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo prize), a specific game capable of suggesting the currently set probability set value can be played, and the interest of the game different from the variable display game can be increased. Can be increased.

The information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo prize) is not limited to the currently set probability set value and can be changed as appropriate. Degree (big hit expectation degree, reach occurrence expectation degree, etc.).
Further, a specific game (a game triggered by a pseudo prize) different from the variable display game is not limited to the roulette effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
Also, with the pseudo prize, the expected degree suggestion image G2 shown in, for example, FIGS. 51A and 51D, that is, a specific image (for example, a character image “?” Or a character image “!”) Is displayed. You may do it.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combinations.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.
For example, in the modified examples B and C described above, the decoration special figure variable display game is executed on the main display device (segment display device) 41a, and the effects and the like are executed on the sub display device 41b. Further, the main display device 41a may be a display device (such as a liquid crystal display device) similar to the sub display device 41b.

10 gaming machine 30 gaming board 32 gaming area 32L left downflow area (predetermined gaming ball downflow area)
32R Right downflow area (predetermined game ball downflow area)
32W warp flow path (predetermined game ball flow down area)
41 display device (display means)
41L left overlap area (overlap area)
41R Right overlap area (overlap area)
41W Warp overlap area (overlap area)
100 game control device (setting means)
300 effect control device (game executing means, suggestive effect executing means, selecting means, specific game executing means)
1920 Distributing member (switching means)
1930 Rotating body (switching means)
G2 Expectation degree suggestion image

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed in a plurality of variability display regions based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when a result of the game is a special result,
A suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined identification information may be stopped and displayed can be executed for each of the plurality of variable display areas,
In the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of specific images are displayed,
A gaming machine, wherein the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display area differs depending on the arrangement order of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in the suggestion effect.   The specific image displayed in the suggested effect is displayed in a superimposed manner on the variable display region targeted by the suggested effect of the plurality of variable display regions, or in the variable display region targeted by the suggested effect. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machines are displayed side by side.

Images